HomeMy WebLinkAboutMATERIAL INFORMATION - 20-00206 - Rexburg Ball Fields ConcessionsCity of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 1
SECTION 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Formwork for cast-in-place concrete, with shoring, bracing, and anchorage.
2. Formwork accessories.
3. Form stripping.
4. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete.
5. Cast-in-place concrete.
a. Foundations, footings.
b. Foundation walls.
c. Load-bearing building walls.
d. Slabs.
6. Concrete curing.
7. Concrete joints.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 31 – Excavation and Fill: For sub-base and base preparation
2. Division 7 – Cementitious Waterproofing/Dampproofing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Date: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when character-
istics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances war-
rant adjustments.
1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and placement of the following:
1. Reinforcement: Comply with ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, diagrams of
bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement, and splices.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the following documents, except where require
ments of the contract documents or if governing codes and governing authorities are
more stringent:
1. ACI 201.2
2. ACI 302.1R
3. ACI 301
4. ACI 318
5. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice
B. Testing Agency Services:
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 2
1. Employ, at contractor's expense, an independent testing agency acceptable to
the architect to perform specified tests and other services required for quality as-
surance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMWORK
A. Facing Materials:
1. Unexposed finish concrete: Any standard form materials that produce structural-
ly sound concrete.
2. Exposed finish concrete: Materials that will produce smooth, stain-free final ap-
pearance and minimum number of joints.
B. Formwork Accessories:
1. Form coating: Form release agent that will not adversely affect concrete surfac-
es or prevent subsequent application of concrete coatings.
2. Metal ties: Commercially manufactured types; cone snap ties, taper removable
bolt, or other type which will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches from surface
of concrete when forms are removed, leaving not more than a 1-inch-diameter
hole in concrete surface.
a. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates.
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars complying with the following, except where
otherwise indicated:
1. ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
B. Reinforcing Accessories:
1. Tie wire: Black annealed type, 16-1/2 gage or heavier.
2. Supports: Bar supports conforming to specifications of CRSI "Manual of Stand-
ard Practice."
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, and as follows:
1. Type II, except where other type is specifically permitted or required.
a. Type II may be replaced by Type III (high early strength) for concrete placed
during cold weather.
B. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C94.
C. Aggregates:
1. Normal weight concrete: ASTM C 33.
a. Local aggregates not in compliance with ASTM C 33 but which have demon-
strated capacity to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may
be used when specifically approved through normal approval process.
D. Admixtures - General: Admixtures which result in more than 0.1 percent of soluble
chloride ions by weight of cement are prohibited.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 3
E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260 and certified by manufacturer for compatibility
with other mix components.
F. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
G. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
H. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixtures: ASTM C 494, Type E.
I. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor Retarder: Membrane for installation beneath slabs on grade, resistant to decay
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, and as follows:
1. Polyethylene sheet, not less than 8 mils thick.
B. Nonshrink Grout: ASTM C 1107.
1. Type: Provide either metallic or nonmetallic type, as appropriate to conditions
and as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Burlap: AASHTO M 182, Class 2 jute or kenaf cloth.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, and as follows:
1. Curing paper.
2. Polyethylene film.
3. White burlap-polyethylene sheeting.
D. Liquid Curing Compounds:
1. Material - curing compounds: Comply with ASTM C 309, Type 1.
F. Underlayment Compound: Self-leveling cementitious compound designed for pump-
ing.
G. Epoxy Bonding Systems: ASTM C 881; type, grade, and class as required for project
conditions.
2.5 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Proportioning of Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with recommendations of ACI
211.1.
B. Specified Compressive Strength f'(c) at 28 Days for Locations as Indicated on Drawings:
1. Exterior concrete expsosed to freeze/thaw: 4,500 psi. – water to cement ratio
0.45 maximum.
2. Interior slabs on grade: 3,500 psi. – water to cement ratio 0.45 maximum.
3. All other concrete: 3,000 psi. – water cement ratio 0.50 maximum
C. Admixtures:
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 4
1. Air-entraining admixture: Use in mixes for exterior exposed concrete unless oth-
erwise specifically indicated. Add at rate to achieve total air content in accord-
ance with Table 1.4.3 of ACI 201.2.
a. Do not use in slabs-on-grade scheduled to receive topping, unless
manufacturer of topping recommends use over air-entrained concrete.
2. Water-reducing admixture: Add as required for placement and workability.
3. Water-reducing and retarding admixture: Add as required in concrete mixes to
be placed at ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F.
4. Water-reducing and accelerating admixture: Add as required in concrete mixes
to be placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F.
5. High-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Add as required for
placement and workability.
6. Do not use admixtures not specified or approved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE FORM PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 for formwork, and as herein specified.
The contractor is responsible for design, engineering, and construction of formwork,
and for its timely removal.
B. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete sur-
faces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete
surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 ver-
tical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy
removal.
1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
D. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve re
quired elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units
to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
E. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior areas of
formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and se-
curely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms
at inconspicuous locations.
F. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and
bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing
such items.
G. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, saw-
dust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.
H. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar
leaks and maintain proper alignment.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 5
I. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-edging agent, according to manufacturer’s
written instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining
work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings,
templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1. Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required.
2. Install hold down bolts accurately, located to elevations required.
3.3 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION
A. General: Place vapor retarder sheet over prepared base material, aligning longer di-
mension parallel to direction of pour and lapped 6 inches. Seal joints with appropriate
tape. Cover with sand or rigid insulation as shown on drawings. Trades shall seal with
appropriate tape, all penetrations required for underslab utilities.
3.4 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 and as herein specified
B. Preparation: Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale soil and other ma-
terials which adversely affect bond with concrete.
3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated on draw-
ings. If construction joints are not indicated, locate in manner which will not im-
pair strength and will have least impact on appearance, as acceptable to the ar-
chitect.
1. Keyways: Provide keyways not less than 1-1/2 inches deep.
2. Reinforcement: Continue reinforcement across and perpendicular to
construction joints, unless details specifically indicate otherwise.
B. Control Joints: Construct contraction joints in slabs poured on grade to form
panels of sizes indicated on drawings, but not more than 10 feet apart in either
direction.
1. Saw cuts: Form control joints by means of saw cuts one-fourth slab depth.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Inspection: Before beginning concrete placement, inspect formwork, reinforcing
steel, and items to be embedded, verifying that all such work has been complet-
ed.
1. Wood forms: Moisten immediately before placing concrete in locations
where form coatings are not used.
B. Placement - General: Comply with requirements of ACI 304 and as follows:
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 6
1. Schedule continuous placement of concrete to prevent the formation of
cold joints.
2. Provide construction joints if concrete for a particular element or compo-
nent cannot be placed in a continuous operation.
3. Deposit concrete as close as possible to its final location, to avoid segre-
gation.
C. Placement in Forms: Limit horizontal layers to depths which can be properly
consolidated, but in no event greater than 24 inches.
1. Vibrate concrete sufficiently to achieve consistent consolidation without
segregation of coarse aggregates.
2. Do not use vibrators to move concrete laterally.
D. Slab Placement: Schedule continuous placement and consolidation of concrete
within planned construction joints.
1. Thoroughly consolidate concrete without displacing reinforcement or em-
bedded items, using internal vibrators, vibrating screeds, roller pipe
screeds, or other means acceptable to architect.
2. Strike off and level concrete slab surfaces, using highway straightedges,
darbies, or bull floats before bleed water can collect on surface. Do not
work concrete further until finishing operations are commenced.
3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. General: Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing
formwork.
1. Grout cleaned finish (sack coat): Remove ties, fill voids and repair defec-
tive areas.
a. Apply to exposed surfaces indicated or to be covered with paint. Ap-
ply after all contiguous surfaces are accessible; do not clean as work
progresses.
B. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material
with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other
projections exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified.
C. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete impaired by form-facing material, ar-
ranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair
and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections ex-
ceeding 1/8 inch in height.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a
coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as water-
proofing, dampproofing, painting, etc.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar un-
formed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a
texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of
formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated.
3.8 FINISHING SLABS
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 7
A. Finishing Operations - General:
1. Do not directly apply water to slab surface or dust with cement.
2. Use hand or powered equipment only as recommended in ACI 302.1R.
3. Screeding: Strikeoff to required grade and within surface tolerances indi-
cated. Verify conformance to surface tolerances. Correct deficiencies
while concrete is still plastic.
4. Bull Floating: Immediately following screeding, bull float or darby before
bleed water appears to eliminate ridges, fill in voids, and embed coarse
aggregate. Recheck and correct surface tolerances.
5. Final floating: Float to embed coarse aggregate, to eliminate ridges, to
compact concrete, to consolidate mortar at surface, and to achieve uni-
form, sandy texture. Recheck and correct surface tolerances.
6. Troweling: Trowel immediately following final floating. Apply first trowel-
ing with power trowel except in confined areas, and apply subsequent
trowelings with hand trowels. Wait between trowelings to allow concrete
to harden. Do not overtrowel. Begin final troweling when surface pro-
duces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over it. Consolidate concrete
surface by final troweling operation. Completed surface shall be free of
trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and within surface tol-
erance specified.
a. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through final
floor covering system.
B. Coordinate appearance and texture of required final finishes with the architect
before application.
C. Broomed Float Finish: After floating and when water sheen has practically dis-
appeared, apply uniform transverse corrugations approximately 1/16 inch deep,
without tearing surface.
D. Trowel Finish: As specified above.
E. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Follow trowel finishing operation immediately
with fine brooming to achieve slightly scarified surface.
F. Slab Surface Tolerances:
1. Achieve flat, level planes except where grades are indicated. Slope uni-
formly to drains.
2. Floated finishes: Depressions between high spots shall not exceed 5/16
inch under a 10-foot straightedge.
3. Troweled finishes: Achieve level surface plane so that depressions be-
tween high spots do not exceed the following dimension, using a 10-foot
straightedge:
a. 1/4 inch.
G. Slab Finish Schedule: Apply finishes in the following typical locations and as
otherwise shown on the drawings:
1. Broomed float:
a. Exterior slabs not otherwise scheduled.
2. Trowel finish:
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 8
a. Exposed interior floors not otherwise scheduled.
b. Surfaces to receive resilient flooring.
c. Surfaces to receive carpet.
3. Trowel and Fine Broom finish:
a. Exterior steps and landings.
b. Exterior pedestrian ramps.
c. Sidewalks.
3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General:
1. Prevent premature drying of freshly placed concrete, and protect from ex-
cessively cold or hot temperatures until concrete has cured.
2. Provide curing of concrete by one of the methods listed and as appropri-
ate to service conditions and type of applied finish in each case.
B. Curing Period:
1. Not less than 7 days for standard cements and mixes.
2. Not less than 4 days for high early strength concrete using Type III ce-
ment.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces by moist curing with forms in
place for full curing period or until forms are removed.
D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:
1. Start curing as soon as free water has disappeared, but before surface is
dry. Place to protect adjacent concrete edges. Acceptable curing meth-
ods:
a. Water ponding.
b. Water-saturated sand.
c. Water-fog spray.
d. Saturated burlap: Provide 4-inch minimum overlap at joints.
E. Avoid rapid drying at end of curing period.
F. Test field-cured specimens to determine potential compressive strength of con-
crete for specific locations.
3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect.
Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect’s ap-
proval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement
to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.2mm) sieve, using only
enough water for handling and placing.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities,
cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock, pockets, fins, and other projections on
the surface, and stains and other discoloration that cannot be removed by cleaning.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 9
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids
more than 2½ inch (13mm) in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than
1 inch (25mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface.
Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent.
Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-
tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement
and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching will match surrounding
color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color
match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off
slightly higher than surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete’s durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for
finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high
areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a
sloped template.
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls,
popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch
(.25mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unrein-
forced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finish-
ing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Fin-
ish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25mm) or
less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove de-
fective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least
¾ inch (19mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with
patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same ma-
terials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place,
compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same man-
ner as adjacent concrete.
5. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25mm) or less in diameter with
patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and
clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and
apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.
Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched
area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect’s approval, using epoxy ad-
hesive and patching mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Archi-
tect’s approval.
3.11 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Composite Sampling, and Making and Curing of Specimens: ASTM C 172 and
ASTM C 31.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 10
B. Slump: ASTM C 143. One test per batch.
1. Modify sampling to comply with ASTM C 94.
C. Air Content of Normal Weight Concrete: ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231. One test
per strength test performed on air-entrained concrete.
D. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39.
1. Testing for acceptance of potential strength of as-delivered concrete:
a. Obtain samples on a statistically sound, random basis.
b. Minimum frequency:
1) One set per 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each
day’s pour of each concrete class.
2) One set per 3500 square feet of slab or wall area or frac-
tion thereof for each day’s pour of each concrete class.
END OF SECTION 03 3000
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04 2000 - 1
SECTION 04 2000 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:
1. Concrete masonry units.
2. Pre-faced CMUs.
3. Mortar and grout.
4. Reinforcing steel.
5. Masonry joint reinforcement.
6. Ties and anchors.
7. Embedded flashing.
8. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following net-area compressive strengths (f'm)
at 28 days. Determine compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms
according to ASTM C1314.
1. For Concrete Unit Masonry: f'm = 1900 psi.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured
product specified, including specialty acoustical block.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing
bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
Show elevations of reinforced walls.
2. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special
applications.
3. Layout of Multiple Concrete Block Textures and Colors: Provide layout drawings
illustrating materials required on exterior elevations. Demonstrate understanding
of all colors, textures, control joints, cold joints prior to beginning installation.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:
1. CMU Samples in small-scale form showing the full range of colors and textures
available for each different exposed masonry unit required.
2. Colored mortar Samples showing the full range of colors available.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04 2000 - 2
D. Samples for Verification: For the following:
1. Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit and CMU veneer unit
required, showing the full range of exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to
be expected in the completed construction.
2. Colored mortar Samples for each color required, showing the full range of colors
expected in the finished construction. Make samples using the same sand and
mortar ingredients to be used on Project. Label Samples to indicate types and
amounts of pigments used.
3. Accessories embedded in the masonry.
E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following
items complies with requirements:
1. Each type of masonry unit required.
a. Include test data, measurements, and calculations establishing net-area
compressive strength of masonry units.
2. Each cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of
manufacturer, brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery.
3. Each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type.
4. Each type and size of anchor, tie, and metal accessory.
5. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
F. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment
to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements.
G. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement,
prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams,
arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement
required for openings through concrete structures.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1093 to conduct the
testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform
texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these
characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product
required.
C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
D. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to
perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retest materials failing to meet
specified requirements.
1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each concrete masonry unit indicated, per
ASTM C 140.
2. Prism Test: For each type of wall construction indicated, per ASTM C1314.
3. Mortar Test: For mortar properties per ASTM C270 or ASTM C780.
4. Grout Test: For compressive strength per ASTM C1019.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04 2000 - 3
E. Mockups: Before installing unit masonry, build mockups to verify selections made
under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of
materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements,
using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Locate mockups as directed by Architect.
2. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on the Architectural Drawings.
a. Typical exterior unit masonry wall.
3. Clean exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated.
4. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
5. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
7. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;
relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints;
and aesthetic qualities of workmanship.
a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities
specifically approved by Architect in writing.
b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in mockups, unless such deviations are
specifically approved by Architect in writing.
8. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
F. Mason contractor shall have minimum of 5 years in business as a mason contractor.
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in
an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting,
securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
1. Protect Type I concrete masonry units from moisture absorption so that, at the
time of installation, the moisture content is not more than the maximum allowed
at the time of delivery.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained
and contamination avoided.
D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting
and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery
containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal
dispensing silo with weatherproof cover.
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and
accumulation of dirt and oil.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04 2000 - 4
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills
with waterproof sheeting at end of each days work. Cover partially completed
masonry when construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely
in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads
for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to
be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in
contact with such masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by
coverings spread on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with
painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain
from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or
coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit
masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather
construction requirements contained in Section 2104.3 of the International Building
Code.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature
is 40 degrees F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not
less than 7 days after completing cleaning.
E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and
humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout.
Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required.
1. When ambient temperature exceeds 90 degrees F with a wind velocity greater
than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry.
Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS – GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage
of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the
standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed
Work.
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with
requirements for fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to
ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04 2000 - 5
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers,
bonding, and other special conditions.
2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners.
D. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards for types required, and as follows:
1. Size:
a. Standard units with nominal dimensions of 16 inches long, 8 inches high,
and 8 inches thick (15-5/8 by 7-5/8 by 7-5/8 actual).
2. Special shapes and size: Provide special block types and sizes where required
for corners, control joints, headers, lintels, pilasters, and other special conditions,
whether or not specifically indicated on the drawings as special.
a. Outside corners: Square-edged units except where otherwise indicated.
3. Hollow load-bearing units: ASTM C 90 and as follows:
a. Type I: Moisture-controlled units (moisture content 30% or less)
b. Normal weight.
c. Exposed faces:
1) Interior Units: Smooth, fluted, scored, split-face and ground face, all
with integral colors (colors to be selected by architect from
manufacturer’s standard integral colors).
2) Exterior Units: Smooth, fluted, scored, split-face and ground face all
with integral colors (colors to be selected by architect from
manufacturer’s standard integral colors).
3) Refer to Drawings for location of varying face types, colors and
additional information.
4. Masonry Caps: Solid masonry caps with integral color, nominal dimensions of 16
inches long, 2 inches high, and 6 inches wide. Units must be factory fabricated.
a. Texture: Manufacturer’s standard texture.
b. Refer to drawings for additional information.
5. Color:
a. Up to 2 colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard
colors.
2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-
weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce
mortar color indicated.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C270, Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM
C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207.
D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C150 portland cement.
1. For colored-aggregate mortar, use natural color or white cement as necessary to
produce required mortar color.
E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; Use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing
the No. 16 sieve.
1. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or
other sound stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04 2000 - 6
G. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides,
compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory
performance in masonry mortar.
H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Non-chloride, non-corrosive, accelerating admixture
complying with ASTM C 494, Type C, and recommended by the manufacturer for use
in masonry mortar of composition indicated.
I. Water: Potable.
J. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:
a. Eaglebond; Blue Circle Cement.
b. Color Mortar Blend; Glen-Gery Corporation.
c. Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Cement/Lime; Holnam, Inc.
d. Centurion Colorbond PL; Lafarge Corporation.
e. Lehigh Custom Color Portland/Lime; Lehigh Portland Cement Co.
f. Riverton Portland Cement Lime Custom Color; Riverton Corporation (The).
2. Mortar Cement:
a. Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement; Blue Circle Cement.
b. Lafarge Mortar Cement; Lafarge Corporation.
3. Colored Mortar Cement:
a. Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement; Blue Circle Cement.
4. Colored Masonry Cement:
a. Magnolia Masonry Cement; Blue Circle Cement.
b. Brixment-in-Color; Essroc Materials, Inc.
c. Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Masonry Cement; Holnam, Inc.
d. Centurion Colorbond; Lafarge Corporation.
e. Lehigh Custom Color Masonry Cement; Lehigh Portland Cement Co.
f. Coosa Masonry Cement; National Cement Company, Inc.
g. Flamingo Color Masonry Cement; Riverton Corporation (The).
h. Richcolor Masonry Cement; Southdown, Inc.
5. Mortar Pigments:
a. True Tone Mortar Colors; Davis Colors.
b. Centurion Pigments; Lafarge Corporation.
c. SGS Mortar Colors; Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc.
6. Cold-Weather Admixture:
a. Accelguard 80; Euclid Chemical Co.
b. Morseled; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Division.
c. Trimix-NCA; Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.
2.3 REINFORCING STEEL
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
2.4 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: ASTM A951 and as follows:
1. Hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for exterior walls.
2. Wire Size for Side Rods: See Drawings.
3. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units
where indicated.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04 2000 - 7
B. For single-wythe veneer, provide a wire in the mortar joint spaced as shown on the
Drawings.
2.5 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Metal Flashing: Fabricate from the following metal complying with requirements
specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and below:
1. Stainless Steel: 0.0156-inch-thick.
2. Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from stainless steel
with ribs at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar
bond.
3. Fabricate metal expansion-joint strips from stainless steel, formed to shape
indicated.
4. Fabricate metal drip edges from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into
wall and 1/2-inch out from wall, with a hemmed outer edge bent down 30
degrees.
5. Fabricate metal flashing terminations from stainless steel. Extend at least 3
inches into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend
metal back on itself for 3/4-inch and then down into joint 3/8-inch to form a stop
for retaining sealant backer rod.
B. Contractor's Option for Concealed Flashing: For flashing partly exposed to the
exterior, use metal flashing specified above. For flashing not exposed to the exterior,
use the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Manufacturer's standard composite flashing
product consisting of a polyester-reinforced ethylene interpolymer alloy 0.025-
inch-thick with a 0.015-inch-thick layer of rubberized-asphalt adhesive.
a. Provide flashing as a complete system with preformed corners, end dams,
other special shapes, and seaming materials; all produced by flashing
sheet manufacturer.
C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Division 7 Section
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's
standard products or products recommended by the flashing manufacturer for bonding
flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.
E. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include the following:
1. Metal Flashing:
a. Cheney Flashing (Dovetail); Cheney Flashing Company, Inc.
b. Cheney Flashing (Sawtooth); Cheney Flashing Company, Inc.
c. Keystone 3-Way Interlocking Thruwall Flashing; Keystone Flashing Co.
2. Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing:
a. Hyload Flashing Membrane; Hyload Cloaked Flashing System.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Pre-molded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from
urethane.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04 2000 - 8
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard
sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as
indicated.
1. Styrene-Butadiene-Rubber Compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805.
2. PVC: ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D
226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
D. Round Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Medium-density polyethylene, 3/8-inch OD by 4
inches long.
E. Plastic Weep Hole/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant
polypropylene copolymer, designed to fill head joint with outside face held back 1/8
inch from exterior face of masonry, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.
F. Cavity Drainage Material: 2-inch-thick, free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene
strands and shaped to avoid being clogged by mortar droppings, or 3/8-inch pea
gravel.
G. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cavity drainage
materials that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:
1. Plastic Weep Hole/Vent:
a. Cell Vent; Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
2. Cavity Drainage Material:
a. Mortar Break; Advanced Building Products, Inc.
b. CavClear Masonry Mat; CavClear.
c. Mortar Net; Mortar Net USA, Ltd.
d. Mortar Stop; Polytite Manufacturing Corp.
2.7 WALL INSULATION
A. Refer to Division 7.
2.8 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup dry measure tetrasodium
polyphosphate and 1/2-cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. of water.
B. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for
removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from
new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product
expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of
masonry units being cleaned.
2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents,
accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other
admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at the same rate for all mortar, regardless
of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04 2000 - 9
B. Pre-blended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a pre-
blended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and
thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Proportion Specification.
1. Extended-Life Mortar for Unit Masonry: Mortar complying with ASTM C 1142
may be used instead of mortar specified above, at Contractor's option.
2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar cement, and
lime.
3. For masonry below grade, in contact with earth, and where indicated, use Type
M.
4. For all reinforced masonry use Type M except interior non-load bearing
partitions, Type S.
D. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce
color required. Limit pigments to the following percentages of cement content by
weight:
1. For mineral-oxide pigments and Portland cement-lime mortar, not more than 10
percent.
2. For carbon-black pigment and Portland cement-lime mortar, not more than 2
percent.
3. For mineral-oxide pigments and masonry cement mortar, not more than 5
percent.
4. For carbon-black pigment and masonry cement mortar, not more than 1 percent.
E. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored
aggregates combined with selected cementitious materials.
1. Mix to match integral color of CMU being applied too.
F. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476.
1. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C
143.
2. Grout shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2000 psi at 28 days.
G. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: Mix epoxy pointing mortar to comply with mortar
manufacturer's directions.
2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor shall engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform source
quality-control testing indicated below:
1. Retest materials failing to meet specified requirements.
B. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type of concrete masonry unit indicated, units
will be tested according to ASTM C 140.
C. Masonry units shall be furnished from the manufacturer, delivered to the site, free of
voids, pockets, chipped corners and other defects.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04 2000 - 10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions
detrimental to performance.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations
of piping connections.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full
thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual widths of masonry units, using
units of widths indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this Section and in
other Sections of the Specifications.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After
installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately
adjacent to the opening.
D. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges.
Cut units as required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction.
Where possible, use full-size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water-cooled
saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut
surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of
colors and textures.
1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following:
B. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4-inch in 20 feet,
nor 1/2-inch maximum.
C. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than
1/4-inch in 10 feet, nor 1/2-inch maximum.
D. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals,
do not vary from level by more than 1/4-inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2-inch maximum.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04 2000 - 11
E. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/8-inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2-inch. Do not vary from bed-
joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8-inch.
F. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/8-inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by
more than 1/8-inch.
3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform
joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns,
and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and,
where possible, at other locations. Place less than half size units at expansion control
joints.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the bond patterns
indicated on the Architectural drawings; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch
horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. Where not specifically indicated, use
the bond pattern as follows:
1. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in
courses above and below.
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond. Bond and interlock
each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch
horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
D. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back one-half-unit length for one-
half running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, and remove
loose masonry units and mortar before laying fresh masonry.
E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other
Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
F. Fill space between hollow-metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless
otherwise indicated.
G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a
layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates,
beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions to height indicated on Drawings, and brace as
indicated.
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows:
1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04 2000 - 12
2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers,
columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with
grout.
3. For starting course on footings invert a bond beam unit.
B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than
the joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes
(other than paint), unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T"
sections. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at
returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural
members to comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 2-inch in width between masonry and
structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar
or other rigid materials.
3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Install expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build-in related
items as masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement
joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition
movement.
B. Form expansion joints in concrete masonry as follows:
1. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit
masonry is complete.
3.9 LINTELS
A. Provide masonry lintels for all openings of more than 24 inches where shown without
structural steel or other supporting lintels.
1. Provide lintels made from bond beam matching concrete masonry units in color,
texture, and compressive strength and with reinforcing bars indicated or required
to support loads indicated. Cure pre-cast lintels by the same method used for
concrete masonry units.
B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04 2000 - 13
3.10 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels,
ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Unless otherwise indicated, place through-wall flashing on sloping
bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in
flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
C. Install flashing as follows:
1. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing from exterior face of veneer, through
veneer, up face of sheathing at least 8 inches, and behind air-infiltration barrier or
building paper.
2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches into masonry
at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 4 inches at ends and turn
flashing up not less than 2 inches to form a pan.
3. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less
than 1-1/2 inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap
with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants" for application indicated.
4. Extend sheet metal flashing 1/2-inch beyond face of masonry at exterior and turn
flashing down to form a drip.
D. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry
immediately above embedded flashing and as follows:
1. Use rectangular plastic tubing or vinyl weep hole/vents to form weep holes.
2. Space weep holes formed from plastic or vinyl tubing 16 inches o.c.
3. Place cavity drainage material immediately above flashing in cavities.
E. Install vents in vertical head joints at the top of each continuous cavity at spacing
indicated. Use rectangular plastic tubing vinyl weep hole/vents to form vents.
3.11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make it
sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support
forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced
masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have
hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that
may be placed on them during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained
sufficient strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1 for cleanouts and for grout placement,
including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Hold grout 1.5 inches below top of block at grout lift joints.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04 2000 - 14
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner shall engage a qualified special inspection agency to perform special
inspections as required by the special inspection program and to oversee Contractor’s
testing agency.
B. Testing Frequency: Tests and Evaluations listed in this Article will be performed per
ACI 530 (Level B Quality Assurance for load-bearing units and Level A Quality
Assurance for masonry veneer).
C. Mortar properties will be tested per ASTM C 780.
D. Grout will be sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019.
E. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type of concrete masonry unit indicated, units
will be tested according to ASTM C 140.
F. Prism-Test Method: For each type of wall construction indicated, masonry prisms will
be tested per ASTM C 1314, and as follows:
1. Prepare one set of prisms for testing at 7 days and one set for testing at 28 days.
H. Field construction of CMU face units is not allowed. All face units shall be
manufactured by the factory.
I. Unity masonry units shall be placed plumb and straight, placed units not in compliance
shall be replaced as directed by the architect.
3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or
otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match
adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant
application.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to
remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as
follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic
scrape hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned
for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before
proceeding with cleaning of masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by
covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or
waterproof masking tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly
by rinsing the surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04 2000 - 15
5. Clean brick by the bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA
Technical Notes No. 20, using job-mixed detergent solution.
6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2
applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.
3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Recycling: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's
property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including broken masonry
units, waste mortar, and excess or soil-contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing
with fill material as fill is placed.
1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension.
2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of
masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.
C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess, clean masonry waste that cannot be used
as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off
Owner's property.
D. Mortar mixing area shall be cleared weekly and in compliance with the approved
SWPPP plan
END OF SECTION 04 2000
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 1
SECTION 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipe and tube railings.
2. Misc. steel fabrication and assemblies.
3. Shop coatings.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance Requirements: Where complete sizes or dimensions of structur-
al members, connections, or fasteners of any item are not indicated, design the item to
produce strength appropriate to the use intended.
B. Handrails: Design to resist the loads specified by applicable building code(s).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Paint products.
2. Hand railing.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other
Sections.
2. Layout for all guardrails and handrail systems.
3. Layout for all stair systems.
D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to
those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance,
as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
2. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for
welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other
construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 2
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without
delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal
fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that
actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Allow for trimming and
fitting.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts,
anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or
masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS - METALS
A. Steel Shapes (Ferrous Metals):
1. Plates, bars, angles, channels, and H-sections: ASTM A 36.
2. Pipe: ASTM A 53 (black steel and hot-dip galvanized), standard weight (Schedule
40), unless otherwise indicated, or weight and type as required by structural loads.
a. Galvanizing: ASTM A 53, (G185 nominal).
b. For exterior applications and where indicated, provide hot-dip galvanized
coating per ASTM A 53.
3. Steel tubing: ASTM 500, cold formed steel tubing.
a. Grade A or Grade B, unless otherwise indicated.
b. For exterior applications and where indicated, provide hot-dip galvanized
coating per ASTM A 53.
2.2 MATERIALS – MISCELLANEOUS
A. Grout: Nonshrink, factory blended and packaged; complying with ASTM C 1107.
B. Fasteners: Use fasteners suitable for the material being fastened and for the type of
connection required.
1. For exterior use or built into exterior walls: Nonferrous stainless steel, zinc coated or
cadmium plated.
2. Use fasteners of same material as items being fastened unless otherwise indicated.
3. Bolts and studs: ASTM A 307.
4. Nuts: ASTM A 563.
5. Lag bolts: FS FF-B-561.
6. Machine screws: FS FF-S-92.
7. Wood screws: FS FF-S-111.
8. Plain washers: FS FF-W-92.
9. Lock washers: FS FF-W-84.
10. Expansion shields: FS FF-S-325.
11. Toggle bolts: FS FF-B-588.
12. Rivets: Industrial grade
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 3
C. Shop Primer: Fabricator's standard primer, comply with MPI#79.
D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 high-zinc-dust content paint for re-galvanizing
welds in steel.
2.3 FABRICATION - GENERAL
A. Fabricate and shop-assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site.
1. Prepare and reinforce fabrications as required to receive applied items.
2. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
3. Make exposed joints tight, flush, and hairline.
4. Paint all cut/exposed metal created in the fabrication process with 2 coats of “Galva-
Paint”.
5. Touch-up all welds, damage, etc. with “Galva-Paint”.
B. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners if possible.
1. Exposed fasteners: Flathead, countersunk type unless otherwise indicated.
C. Anchors: Fabricate to suit conditions indicated; use anchors of same material and finish
as item except where specifically indicated otherwise.
D. Welding:
1. Welding of steel: Comply with AWS D1.1 recommendations.
2. Provide continuous welds at welded corners and seams.
3. Exposed welds: Grind flush and smooth.
E. Joints Exposed to Weather: Fabricate to keep water out, or provide adequate drainage
of water that penetrates.
2.4 FABRICATION – RAILINGS AND GATES
A. Steel Pipe/Tube Railings and Gates:
1. Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, standard weight.
2. Shop prime.
3. Connections: Welded and ground.
4. Welding: Fill joints completely and grind off flush.
5. Elbows: Bent or mitered.
6. Tee and cross intersections: Coped and welded.
7. Exposed ends: Close with prefabricated fittings or with 3/16-inch-thick steel plate
fully welded.
2.5. FABRICATION – GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32-inch, unless otherwise indicated.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 4
D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended
so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches
that of adjacent surface.
E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure.
Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and
to support indicated loads.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware,
screws, and similar items.
G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or
provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in
ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening up of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base
engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain
and nighttime-sky heat loss.
a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material
surfaces.
I. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and
straight sharp edges.
J. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
K. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fas-
teners where possible. Use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) exposed screws or bolts.
Locate joints where least conspicuous.
2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.9 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard
listed below:
1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
2. ASTM A 153, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 5
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications
and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast
Cleaning."
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or
masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Spec-
ification No. 1," for shop painting.
2.10 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and
class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.
D. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B18.22.1.
E. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B18.21.1.
F. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when
installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in
concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
G. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as needed
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Anchor metal fabrications to substrates indicated; provide all fasteners required.
B. Perform all field fabrication required for installation.
1. Fit joints tightly.
2. Weld joints as indicated.
a. Weld in accordance with AWS code.
b. Exposed welds: Grind flush and smooth.
C. Install items in correct location, plumb and level, without rack or warp.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 6
D. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide steel framing and supports not specified
in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. Fabricate units from steel shapes,
plates, and bars of welded construction. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware,
hangers, and similar items.
1. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel
shapes. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill
holes at 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
2. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction with steel
baseplates and top plates welded to pipe with fillet welds that same size as pipe
wall thickness.
E. Loose Steel Lintels: Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size
indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicat-
ed.
F. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel
items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts.
3.2 CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP
A. Touch up shop paint and galvanized items immediately after erection.
1. Painted Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
touch up paint with the same material as used for shop painting.
2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05 5000
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000 - 1
SECTION 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Definition: Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other
sections and which is generally not exposed, except as otherwise indicated. Types of
work in this section include rough carpentry for:
1. Rough carpentry for:
a. Wood framing.
b. Miscellaneous lumber for attachment and support of other work.
c. Wood furring.
2. Preservative Treatment.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. APA - American Plywood Association.
B. AWPA - American Wood Preservers' Association: Book of Standards.
C. IBC - International Building Code, 2012 Edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 01.
B. Material Certificates: Where dimensional lumber is provided to comply with minimum
allowable unit stresses, submit listing of species and grade selected for each use, and
submit evidence of compliance with specified requirements. Compliance may be in
form of a signed copy of applicable portion of lumber producer's grading rules showing
design values for selected species and grade. Design values shall be as approved by
the Board of Review of American Lumber Standards Committee.
C. Wood Treatment Data: Submit treatment of manufacturer's instructions
1. Pressure Treatment: For each type specified, include certification by treating
plant stating chemicals and process used, net amount of preservative retained
and conformance with applicable standards.
2. For water-borne preservatives, include statement that moisture content of treated
materials was reduced to a maximum of 15 percent prior to shipment to project
site.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against exposure to
weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood, and
provide air circulation within stacks. Store lumber and plywood at least 6 inches above
the ground.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000 - 2
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for
accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar
supports to allow proper attachment of other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS
A. Lumber, General:
1. Factory-mark each piece of lumber with type, grade, mill and grading agency,
except omit marking from surfaces to be exposed with transparent finish or
without finish.
2. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide
actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use.
a. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at
time of dressing.
B. Structural/Stud Framing: Douglas Fir-Larch, Number 2 grade, S-Dry or MC19 (19
percent moisture content), See General Structural Notes for additional information.
C. Non-structural Light Framing: Hem-Fir species, Number 2 grade, 19 percent maximum
moisture content, See General Structural Notes for allowable stresses and additional
information.
D. Miscellaneous Lumber:
1. Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including nailers, blocking,
furring, stripping and similar members. Blocking shall be provided for all wall-
mounted door stops, door magnets, toilet partitions, toilet counters, toilet
accessories, etc. Provide lumber of sizes indicated, worked into shapes as
shown on the drawings.
2. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive
wood preservative treatment.
3. Grade: Hem-Fir, grade No. 2 framing size lumber.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated on the
Drawings and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable
Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring
devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type shown on
Drawings or recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommending
nails.
1. Provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot-dip zinc coating (ASTM A 153), for
exterior and treated wood conditions where wood is in contact with ground or
exposed to weather, bright finish elsewhere.
2. Structural nailing shall be with common nails. Vinyl coated sinkers will not be
allowed.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000 - 3
B. Bolts: ASTM A 307, galvanized or cadmium plated where exposed to weather, unless
painted.
1. Galvanized or stainless steel bolts are required if placed in contact with pressure
treated wood.
C. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag
bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolts or ballistic fasteners for
anchorage to steel.
D. Framing Connectors and Supports: Prefabricated, formed steel units; hot-dip
galvanized finish unless otherwise indicated; type and size as require; approved by
applicable codes.
E. Sill Sealer Gaskets: Glass fiber insulation strips; uncompressed thickness, 1 inch (1/32
inch compressed), width to match sill members. Provide under all exterior sill plates.
2.3 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as "PT" or "Treated," or
is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA
Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB Standards listed below. Mark
each treated item with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements.
1. Pressure-treat the following with water-borne preservatives complying with
AWPB LP2. After treatment, kiln-dry to a maximum moisture content of 15
percent. Treat indicated items and the following:
a. Wood nailers, curbs, blocking, stripping, and similar members in
connection with roofing, flashing, vapor retarders and waterproofing.
b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed
members in contact with concrete/CMU.
2. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut
after treatment, coat cut surfaces with two heavy brush coat of same chemicals
used for treatment.
B. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or
defective pieces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Arrange work to use full-length pieces except where lengths would exceed
commercially available lengths. Discard pieces with defects that would lower the
required strength or appearance of the work.
B. See structural drawings for installation requirements.
C. Cut and fit members accurately. Install plumb and true to line and level.
D. Fasten carpentry in accordance with applicable codes and recognized standards.
E. Where exposed, countersink nails and fill flush with suitable wood filler.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000 - 4
3.2 WOOD FRAMING - GENERAL
A. Comply with sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated. Where not specifically
indicated, comply with applicable codes and NFPA “Manual for Wood Frame
Construction.” Splice members only where specifically indicated or approved.
B. Space fasteners as indicated on structural drawings, nailing schedule. Where not
specifically indicated, comply with applicable codes and the “Recommended Nailing
Schedule” of NFPA “Manual for Wood Frame Construction” and “National Design
Specification for Wood Construction.”
C. Fire Stops: Stops of nominal 2-inch-thick lumber in the following typical locations, and
where otherwise indicated.
1. Each floor level and ceiling of top story.
2. Concealed vertical spaces over 10 feet in height occurring in stud walls and
partitions, including furred walls.
3. Interconnections of concealed vertical and horizontal spaces such as at soffits,
drop ceilings, and cove ceilings.
4. Concealed spaces between stair stringers at top and bottom of each run.
5. Concealed spaces behind exterior cornices or other elements: Fire-stop at
intervals not to exceed 20 feet.
3.3 INSTALLATION - FRAMING
A. General:
1. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and
units which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
2. Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb
and true and accurately cut and fitted.
3. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as
shown and as required by recognized standards. Countersink nail heads on
exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
a. Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Vinyl coated
"sinkers" shall not be used. Use finishing nails for finish work. Make tight
connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood;
predrill as required.
B. Wood Nailers, Blocking and Sleepers:
1. Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other
work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of
work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved, including:
flashings, roof curbs, door hardware, wall mounted furnishings, specialties, and
equipment.
2. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts
and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise show.
3. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-beveled lumber
not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground
to exact thickness of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when
no longer required.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000 - 5
3.4 SITE APPLIED TREATMENT
A. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious
materials roofing and related metal flashings and earth.
B. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Treat site-sawn ends.
D. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members.
END OF SECTION 06 1000
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
SHEATHING 06 1600 - 1
SECTION 06 1600 - SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wall sheathing.
2. Roof sheathing.
3. Subflooring.
4. Underlayment.
5. Building paper.
6. Building wrap.
7. Sheathing joint-and-penetration treatment.
8. Flexible flashing at openings in sheathing.
9. Plywood Backing Panels.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate
component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment
manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies
with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of
preservative retained.
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer
and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with
requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials.
3. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type, include
physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated
temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency
according to ASTM D 5516.
4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture
content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to
Project site.
5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each
type of treatment.
6. For building wrap, include data on air-/moisture-infiltration protection based on
testing according to referenced standards.
B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building
code in effect for Project:
1. Preservative-treated plywood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated plywood.
3. Building wrap.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
SHEATHING 06 1600 - 2
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Plywood: DOC PS 1.
B. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.
C. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than
thickness indicated.
D. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.
2.2 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C9.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and
containing no arsenic or chromium.
B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with masonry
or concrete or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2.3 WALL SHEATHING
A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
1. Span Rating: As indicated in General Structural Notes.
2. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings and General Structural Notes.
B. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
1. Span Rating: As indicated on General Structural Notes.
2. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings and General Structural Notes.
2.52.4 ROOF SHEATHING
A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
1. Span Rating: As indicated on General Structural Notes.
2. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings and General Structural Notes.
B. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1, sheathing.
1. Span Rating: As indicated on General Structural Notes.
2. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings and General Structural Notes.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
SHEATHING 06 1600 - 3
2.62.5 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT
A. Plywood Subflooring: Exposure 1 single-floor panels or sheathing.
1. Span Rating: 48/24.
2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch (18.3 mm) or as indicated on
Drawings.
B. Oriented-Strand-Board Subflooring: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.
1. Span Rating: 48/24.
2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch (18.3 mm).
2.72.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-retardant treated plywood
panels with grade designation, APA C-D PLUGGED INT with exterior glue, in thickness
indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than ½-inch.
2.82.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M of Type 304 stainless steel.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
2.92.8 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER
A. Building Paper: UBC Standard 14-1, Grade D (water-vapor-permeable, kraft building
paper), except that water resistance shall be not less than 1 hour and water-vapor
transmission shall be not less than 75 g/sq. m x 24 h.
2.102.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-
01 ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by
manufacturers of both adhesives and panels.
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable,
rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene
film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm).
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing.
b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor
Plus Self-Adhered Flashing.
c. MFM Building Products Corp.; Window Wrap.
d. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 300.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
SHEATHING 06 1600 - 4
C. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible
flashing for substrate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too
small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against
abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will
not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive
finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.
E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant
installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent
exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.
F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match
spacing of structural support elements.
G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing
so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when
rain is forecast.
3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30K, "APA
Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use
panels and applications indicated.
1. Comply with "Code Plus" installation provisions in guide referenced in paragraph
above.
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Subflooring:
a. Glue and nail to wood framing.
b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing.
c. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.
2. Wall and Roof Sheathing:
a. Nail to wood framing. Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing members
at edges of wall sheathing panels.
b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing.
c. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.
3. Underlayment:
a. Nail or staple to subflooring.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
SHEATHING 06 1600 - 5
b. Space panels 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) apart at edges and ends.
c. Fill and sand edge joints of underlayment receiving resilient flooring right
before installing flooring.
3.3 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING-PAPER INSTALLATION
A. General: Cover sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper as follows:
1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch (13 mm) on each side of the break in supporting
members at expansion- or control-joint locations.
2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch (100-mm) overlap,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch (50-mm) overlap and a 6-inch (150-
mm) end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails.
3.4 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written
instructions.
1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches (100 mm), except
that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
3. Lap flashing over weather-resistant building paper at bottom and sides of
openings.
4. Lap weather-resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings.
5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to
ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates.
END OF SECTION 06 1600
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
MANUFACTURED WOOD JOISTS 06 1700 - 1
SECTION 06 1700 – MANUFACTURED WOOD JOISTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Manufactured Plywood Web Trusses/Joists. (TJI)
B. Installation of Trusses/Joists.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. This work includes the complete furnishing and installation of all trusses/joists as
shown on the drawings, herein specified and necessary to complete the work.
1.3 CODE APPROVALS
A. Trusses/Joists shall be designed and manufactured to the standards set forth as
follows:
1. Plywood Web Joists: ICC-ES Report No. ESR-1153.
2. Open Web Trusses: ICC-ES Report No. ESR-1774.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings for fabrication and erection of truss-
es/joists including plans, elevations and large scale details of special connections,
joining and accessories.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Handle units to avoid damage. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and
printed instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers will be considered ac-
ceptable. Other similar systems may be submitted for approval.
1. Trus Joist by Weyerhaeuser
2. Red-i by Redbuilt
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Flange members, web members and adhesives shall conform to the provisions for
types of products as follows:
1. Plywood Web Joists: ICC-ES Report No. ESR-1153
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
MANUFACTURED WOOD JOISTS 06 1700 - 2
B. Rim Board – Engineered wood product 1-1/4 inch x joist depth and as indicated on
drawings.
C. Web Stiffeners: Materials dimensional size and installation as approved and rec-
ommended by manufacturer.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. The trusses/joists shall be manufactured in a plant approved for fabrication by the
building code and under the supervision of an approved third party inspection
agency.
2.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Each of the joists shall be identified by a stamp indicating the joist series, ICC-ES
Evaluation report number, manufacturer's name, plant number, and the independ-
ent inspection agency logo and evaluation report number.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION
A. Install per manufacturer’s written installation requirements.
3.2 INSPECTION
A. The contractor shall give notification to the manufacturer's representative prior to
enclosing the trusses/joists to provide opportunity for inspection of the installation.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. Products shall be proven by testing and evaluation in accordance with the provi-
sions of ASTM D-5055.
3.4 WARRANTY
A. The products delivered shall be free from manufacturing errors or defects in work-
manship and material. The products shall perform to the manufacturer's specifica-
tions for the normal and expected life of the building.
END OF SECTION 06 1700
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06 1753 - 1
SECTION 06 1753 - METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Roof trusses.
2. Truss accessories.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Metal-plate-connected wood trusses include planar structural units consisting of metal-
plate-connected members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled
before delivery to Project site.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and erect metal-plate-connected wood
trusses to withstand design loads within limits and under conditions required.
1. Design Loads: As indicated.
2. Design trusses to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the
following:
a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of span due to total load.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who uses a qualified professional
engineer to prepare calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data for metal-
plate-connected wood trusses.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for lumber, metal-plate connectors, metal framing connectors, bolts, and
fasteners.
C. Shop Drawings detailing location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for
each type of truss required; species, sizes, and stress grades of lumber to be used;
splice details; type, size, material, finish, design values, and orientation and location of
metal connector plates; and bearing details.
1. To the extent truss design considerations are indicated as fabricator's
responsibility, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06 1753 - 2
2. Include truss Shop Drawings signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
D. Product certificates signed by officer of truss fabricating firm certifying that metal-plate-
connected wood trusses supplied for Project comply with specified requirements and
Shop Drawings.
E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and
other information specified.
F. Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable
unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values
approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC) Board of Review.
G. Research or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction that evidence the following products' compliance with
building code in effect for Project.
1. Metal-plate connectors.
2. Metal framing connectors.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed wood
truss installation similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project
and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Fabricator's Qualifications: Engage a firm that complies with the following
requirements for quality control and is experienced in fabricating metal-plate-connected
wood trusses similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful
in-service performance:
1. Fabricator participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that involves
inspection by SPIB; Timber Products Inspection, Inc.; Truss Plate Institute (TPI);
or other independent inspecting and testing agency acceptable to Owner and
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Fabricator must have at least 3 years fabricating metal-plate-connected wood
trusses.
C. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following
publications:
1. ANSI/TP1 1, "National Design Standard for Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Truss
Construction."
2. TPI HIB "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling Installing & Bracing
Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."
3. TPI DSB "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal
Plate Connected Wood Trusses."
D. Metal-Plate Connector Manufacturer's Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member
of TPI and that complies with TPI quality-control procedures for manufacture of
connector plates published in ANSI/TPI 1.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06 1753 - 3
E. Single-Source Responsibility for Connector Plates: Provide metal connector plates
from one source and by a single manufacturer.
F. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of AFPA's
"National Design Specification for Wood Construction" and it’s "Supplement."
G. Single-Source Engineering Responsibility: Provide trusses engineered by metal-plate
connector manufacturer to support superimposed dead and live loads indicated, with
design approved and certified by a qualified professional engineer.
H. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized
to practice in the State of Idaho and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated that have resulted in installing metal-plate-connected
wood trusses similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful
in-service performance.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle and store trusses with care and comply with manufacturer's written instructions
and TPI recommendations to avoid damage and lateral bending.
B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration.
Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid
delaying progress of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Metal Connector Plates:
a. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.
b. Computrus, Inc.
c. Mitek Industries, Inc.
d. Robbins Manufacturing Company.
e. Tee-Lok Corporation.
f. Truswal Systems Corporation.
2. Metal Framing Anchors:
a. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
b. Harlen Metal Products, Inc.
c. Silver Metal Products, Inc.
d. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc.
e. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc.
f. United Steel Products Co.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06 1753 - 4
2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard,"
and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of
Review.
B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference
them, include the following:
1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association.
2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority (Canadian).
3. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
4. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
5. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of
inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and
identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and
mill.
D. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, manufactured to actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified, to comply with requirements indicated below:
1. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of
dressing.
E. Grade and Species: Provide dimension lumber of any species for truss chord and web
members, graded visually or mechanically, and capable of supporting required loads
without exceeding allowable design values according to AFPA's "National Design
Specification for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement."
F. Grade and Species: Provide visually graded dimension lumber for truss chord and
web members, of the following grade and species:
1. To be determined by truss fabricator.
2.3 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES
A. To be determined by truss fabricator.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified below for material and manufacture.
1. Where truss members are exposed to weather or to high relative humidities,
provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of stainless
steel, Type 304 or 316.
B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06 1753 - 5
E. Lag Bolts and Screws: ASME B18.2.1.
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A with ASTM A 563 hex nuts
and, where indicated, flat washers.
2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. General: Provide metal framing anchors of structural capacity, type, size, metal, and
finish indicated that comply with requirements specified, including the following:
1. As manufactured by Simpson Strong Tie.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing a
minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.
B. Protective Coatings: Provide one of the following coating systems:
1. SSPC-Paint 22, epoxy-polyamide primer.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting
joints.
B. Fabricate metal connector plates to size, configuration, thickness, and anchorage
details required to withstand design loadings for types of joint designs indicated.
C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated using jigs or other means to
ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with
tolerances of ANSI/TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated.
1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances of ANSI/TPI 1.
D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded
simultaneously into both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install wood trusses until supporting construction is in place and is braced and
secured.
B. Before installing, splice trusses delivered to Project site in more than one piece.
C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required,
exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other
causes.
D. Install and brace trusses according to recommendations of TPI and as indicated.
E. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting
construction.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06 1753 - 6
F. Space, adjust, and align trusses in location before permanently fastening and as
follows:
1. Truss Spacing: As indicated.
G. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points using metal framing anchors. Install
fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchor according to
manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions.
H. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction
loads are applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or
beams.
1. Install and fasten strongback bracing vertically against vertical web of parallel-
chord floor trusses at centers indicated.
I. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances of ANSI/TPI 1.
J. Do not cut or remove truss members.
K. Return wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements to fabricator and
replace with trusses that do meet requirements.
1. Do not alter trusses in the field.
3.2 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint
according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Protective Coating: Clean and prepare exposed surfaces of embedded-metal
connector plates. Brush-apply primer, when part of coating system, and one coat of
protective coating.
1. Apply materials to provide minimum dry film thickness recommended by
manufacturer of coating system.
END OF SECTION 06 1753
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
STRUCTURAL GLUE-LAMINATED TIMBER 06 1800 - 1
SECTION 06 1800 - STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Manufactured Beams (LVL, PSL, LSL).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For structural lumber and accessories. Include installation instructions
and data on lumber, adhesives, fabrication, treatment, and protection.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of structural lumber system and full dimensions of each
member. Indicate species and laminating combination, adhesive type, and other
variables in required Work.
1. Include large-scale details of connections.
2. Joining and accessories.
C. Certificates of Conformance: Issued by a qualified inspection and testing agency
indicating that glulam timbers comply with requirements of AITC A190.1.
D. Wood-Treatment Certificates: Signed by wood treater certifying that treatment
processes comply with requirements.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and
other information specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed structural
glulam timber construction similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for
this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Quality Standard: Comply with AITC A190.1, "Structural Glued Laminated Timber."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with provisions of AITC 111, "Recommended Practice for Protection
of Structural Glued Laminated Timber during Transit, Storage, and Erection."
B. Individually wrap members with plastic-coated paper covering, with water-resistant
seams, before shipping or exposing to outdoor conditions.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
STRUCTURAL GLUE-LAMINATED TIMBER 06 1800 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED BEAMS (LVL, LSL, PSL)
A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers will be considered acceptable. Other
similar systems may be submitted for approval.
1. iLevel Trus Joist, by Weyerhaeuser.
B. Products: The following products will be considered acceptable. Other similar products may be
submitted for approval.
1. Laminated Strand Lumber (LSL): “Timberstrand” or approved equal. Size and properties
as indicated on drawings.
2. Parallel Strand Lumber (PSL): “Parallam” or approved equal. Size and properties as
indicated on drawings.
3. Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL): “Microllam” or approved equal. Size and properties as
indicated on drawings.
2.2 FABRICATION – MANUFACTURED BEAMS (LVL, LSL, PSL)
A. Fabrication: Manufactured beams shall be manufactured in a plant approved for fabrication by
the building code and under the supervision of an approved third party inspection agency.
B. Identification: Each of the joists shall be identified by a stamp indicating the joist series, ICC-ES
Evaluation report number, manufacturer’s name, plant number, and the independent inspection
agency logo and evaluation report number.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Erect structural lumber framing true and plumb, with uniform, close-fitting joints.
Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are
in place.
1. Use padded slings and protect corners with wood blocking.
2. Observe manufacturers recommended installation requirements.
B. Cutting: Avoid extra cutting after fabrication. Where field fitting is unavoidable, comply with
requirements for shop fabrication.
1. Where treated members must be cut during erection, apply a field-treatment preservative
to comply with AWPA M4.
C. Install steel connectors, anchors, and accessories as indicated.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged structural
lumber if repairs are not approved by Owner.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Do not remove wrappings on individually wrapped members until they no longer serve a useful
purpose, including protection from weather, soiling, and damage from work of other trades.
END OF SECTION 06 1800
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000 - 1
SECTION 06 2000 - FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior running trim.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Include
construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and
profiles, textures, and colors.
B. Samples for Verification:
1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products with nonfactory-applied
finish, with 1/2 of exposed surface finished, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10
inches for panels.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer with 5 years of experience.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack
lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks
and under temporary coverings.
B. Deliver interior finish carpentry only when environmental conditions meet requirements
specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than
installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements
specified for installation areas.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until
building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally
dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity
at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's written
instructions and warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be
applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by
the American Lumber Standards' Committee Board of Review.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency
indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit
grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection
agency.
2.2 INTERIOR RUNNING TRIM
A. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): Grade A, kiln-
dried, finished lumber (S4S), selected for compatible grain and color.
1. Moldings: Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 7. Wood moldings made
from kiln-dried stock and graded under WMMPA WM 4.
a. Moldings for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): N-grade red oak:
Provide material selected for compatible grain and color.
B. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted): Finished lumber (S4S), either finger-jointed
or solid lumber, of the following species and grades:
1. Grade D Select (Quality) Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine;
NLGA or WWPA.
2. Miscellaneous wood trim and caps as indicated on drawings.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of
type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure
attachment, concealed where possible.
1. Where finish carpentry materials are exposed in areas of high humidity, provide
fasteners and anchorages with hot-dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM
A 153/A 153M.
B. Paneling Adhesives: Comply with paneling manufacturer's written recommendations
for adhesives.
C. Glue: Aliphatic- or phenolic-resin wood glue recommended by manufacturer for
general carpentry use.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies
and with manufacturer's written recommendations for moisture content of finish
carpentry at relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in
installation areas.
B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1-inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and
edges of lumber 1-inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
FINISH CARPENTRY 06 2000 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Before installing finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in
installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately
seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
B. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed
shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable.
3. Install to tolerance of 1/8-inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining finish
carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum
offset for reveal installation.
4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide
cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate finish carpentry.
3.4 RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths
of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 12 inches long, except where necessary.
Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact
throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
1. Match color and grain pattern across joints.
2. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent
movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill
holes with wood plugs of same material as trim.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish
carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no
evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied
finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06 2000
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 1
SECTION 06 4023 – INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes items designated on the drawings and as scheduled on the
drawings:
1. Plastic laminate cabinets and accessories.
2. Plastic laminate countertops and splashes.
3. Solid surface window sills.
4. Stainless Steel Countertop and Backsplash
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces visible when drawers and opaque doors are closed;
behind clear glass doors; bottoms of casework 43 inches or more above finished floor.
B. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces which become visible when opaque doors are open
or drawers are extended; bottoms of casework are more than 30 inches and less than
42 inches above finished floor.
C. Concealed Surfaces: Surfaces considered concealed when surfaces not visible after
installation; bottoms of casework less than 30 inches above finished floor; tops of
casework over 78 inches above finished floor and not visible from an upper level;
stretchers, blocking, and components concealed by drawers.
D. Overlay Door: Square edge door and drawer faces overlay cabinet body.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each casework and countertop item specified.
B. Product data for each hardware, specialty and accessory item specified.
C. Shop drawings for casework showing location and size, accessories, materials,
finishes, and filler panels. Include fully dimensioned plans for each room, elevations,
and anchorage details to countertop and walls.
D. Shop drawings for countertops showing sizes, shapes, edge and backsplash profiles,
cutouts for plumbing fixtures, and methods of joining.
E. Samples for verification purposes of each type of material indicated against colors
indicated in the Color Schedule on the drawings; in sets for each color, texture, and
pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.
1. 2-inch-square samples of plastic laminates.
2. 3-inch-long samples of edgings.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 2
3. One unit of each type of exposed hardware.
F. Submit manufacturer’s printed installation instructions for casework.
G. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer certifying that materials furnished
comply with specified requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain casework from a single manufacturer.
B. Casework manufacturer shall be publicly cataloged and shall show evidence of a
minimum of five (5) years of experience in providing casework systems for similar
types of projects.
C. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for
grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other
requirements.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Casework shall conform to the requirements of ADA, including but not limited to the
following requirements:
1. Countertop Height: Where indicated on the drawings, provide countertop height
of 34 inches above finished floor, at a surface depth of 24 inches.
2. Kneespace Clearances: Provide minimum 27 inches vertical clearance from
finish floor to bottom of casework, for a minimum clear width of 30 inches.
3. Wardrobe Cabinets: To be furnished with fixed rod/shelf at a maximum 21-inch
shelf depth.
4. Sink Cabinet and Lavatory Counter Clearances: Where handicapped sink
locations are indicated on the drawings, provide countertop height of 34 inches
above finished floor, at a surface depth of 24 inches, and minimum 27 inches
vertical clearance from finish floor to bottom of casework, with upper kneespace
frontal depth no less than 8 inches, and lower toe frontal depth to be no less than
11 inches at a point 9 inches above finish floor, for a minimum clear width of 30
inches.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver casework as factory-assembled units, packaged individually.
B. Do not deliver casework to jobsite until wet operations in building are complete; store in
a ventilated location, protected from weather.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Comply with casework manufacturers written requirements
for temperature and humidity conditions during storage and installation. Do not install
casework until these conditions have been attained and stabilized.
B. Field Measurements: Verify casework dimensions by field measurements.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 3
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s standard 3-year warranty against defects in workmanship and
materials for casework systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABINET MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Sizes, dimensions, and thicknesses given are minimum dimensions.
B. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD-3, high pressure laminate; available in a full range of
colors; Wilson Art, Formica, Nevamar or approved equal, in the following types:
1. Exterior Cabinet Surfaces: Type GP28 (0.028-inch), color as scheduled.
2. Cabinet Liners and Balancing Sheets: Type CL20 (0.020-inch), white color.
3. Countertops (where not scheduled for resin type): Type GP50 (0.050-inch), color
as scheduled.
4. Pressure Fused Laminates (Melamine): Minimum 80 gram PSF, meeting NEMA
LD-3 Type GP28 and CL20 standards.
5. Wainscot: Same as high pressure plastic laminate.
C. High Performance Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, mat-formed particleboard, Grade 1-M-
3 with minimum density of 45 - 50 pcf, maximum moisture content of 8 percent.
Particleboard cabinet components to be of the following thicknesses prior to lamination:
1. Cabinet backs and drawer bottoms: 3/8-inch.
2. Dividers, as detailed: 1/2-inch.
3. Base and tall cabinet tops and bottoms: 3/4-inch.
4. Cabinet sides: 3/4-inch.
5. Drawer spreaders: 3/4-inch.
6. Doors and drawers: 3/4-inch.
7. Cabinet back rear hangstrips: 3/4-inch.
8. Dividers, as detailed: 3/4-inch.
9. Exposed cabinet backs: 3/4-inch.
10. Sub-tops: 3/4-inch.
11. Wall cabinet tops and bottoms: 1-inch.
12. Sloping tops: 3/4-inch.
13. Door cabinet shelving over 27 inches in width: 1-inch.
14. Exposed cabinet shelving of all widths: 1 inch.
15. Off-wall shelving of all widths: 1-inch.
D. Fiberboard Core: ANSI 208.2, uniform, medium density fiberboard with face screw
holding of 325 pounds, modulus of rupture of 4,000 psi, modulus of elasticity of
400,000 psi, and internal bond of 120 psi. Fiberboard cabinet components to be of the
following thicknesses prior to lamination:
1. Drawer sides, subfronts and backs: 1/2-inch.
2. Drawer under bottom stiffeners: 1/2-inch.
3. Framed glass doors: 3/4-inch.
E. Plywood: ANSI/HPMA HP hardwood and decorative plywood, Good Grade (1) or
better, exterior grade for cabinet bases.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 4
F. Solid Wood: Clear, dry, sound, and free of defects selected from First Grade lumber
as defined by NHLA.
G. Edging Types:
1. Flat Edge PVC: 0.020-inch-thick, solid, high impact, purified, solid color through
entire thickness, acid resistant, machine applied with hot melt adhesives,
automatically trimmed face, back and corners for uniform appearance. Color to
match adjacent plastic laminate, as selected by Architect.
2.2 CABINETWORK
A. Provide types of cabinetwork as follows:
1. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for Plastic
Laminate cabinets.
2. Grade: Custom.
3. Type: Plastic Laminate Cabinetry.
4. Construction: Flush Overlay.
5. Hardware: As specified herein.
6. Color: Wilsonart Limber Maple #10734-60
2.3 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for high-pressure
decorative laminate countertops.
B. Grade: Custom.
C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.
1. Backing Sheet: BK-20.
D. Colors and Finishes: Wilsonart Olive Legacy #4654-60
E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
F. Core Material: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard, 1-inch thick.
G. Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard, or medium-density fiberboard, made with
exterior glue.
H. Backsplash and Endsplash: 3/4-by-4-inch high particleboard or medium-density
fiberboard, faced top, front and edges with same laminate cladding as on horizontal
surfaces.
2.4 SOLID SURFACE WINDOW SILLS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with International Solid Surface Fabricators Association
(ISSFA) requirements for solid surface window sills.
C. EDGE Profile: ½” Round.
D. Color: As selected by Owner by manufacturer’s standard colors.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 5
2.5 HARDWARE
A. Hinges: Heavy duty, five knuckle 2-3/4-inch institutional type meeting ANSI/BHMA
A156.9, Grade 1 requirements; sized for 13/16-inch-thick laminated door. Mill ground,
hospital tip, tight pin feature with all edges eased. Hinge to be full wrap around type of
tempered steel, 0.095 inches thick, with a minimum of nine screws; finish to be chrome
coat powder finish. Furnish in the following quantities:
1. Doors up to 48 inches in height: Two each.
2. Doors over 48 inches in height: Three each.
B. Pulls: 3-1/2” wire loop.
C. Drawer Slides: Minimum 100-pound load rating at full extension, with built-in positive
stop in both directions, with release levers on both sides required to remove drawer.
Self-closing feature, with captive nylon rollers front and rear. Fabricated of epoxy
powder coated cold rolled steel. At paper storage and file drawers, provide full
extension, three-part progressive opening slide function. At pencil drawers, provide
undercounter-mounting hardware.
1. Provide minimum 150-pound load rating at file drawers. Refer to drawings.
D. Catches: Magnetic type, minimum 7 pound pull, adjustable, in plastic housing of color
to match cabinet interior. Provide one per door except where scheduled to receive
chain bolts, and two at doors over 48 inches in height.
E. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Self-locking, twin pin, anti tip-up design of molded plastic or
nylon, minimum 260 pound load rating per support. Pins to interface with pre-drilled
holes in flush interior cabinet sides, and to have provisions for mechanically attaching
shelf to clip.
F. Hooks: Manufacturer’s standard aluminum type.
1. Classrooms: Bobrick B-682 or equal – see Drawings for location and installation.
2. Multiple prong hooks – 4-prong aluminum hook. See Drawing for location and
installation.
G. Cabinet Locks: Removable core, 7-pin, deadbolt cabinet style lock with strike, dull
chrome finish. Furnish with two (2) keys per lock, keyed alike within each room. All
locks to be master-keyed.
1. Best Lock Corporation’s 5L Series, provide spacers, mortise, or bar type strikes
as required.
H. Electrical/Computer cord grommets: 2½-inch round plastic grommet, with slotted
removable cap, color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer standard. Provide
and install 3 additional grommets to be installed per Architects direction.
I. Knee Bracket: KV #208WH500, or equal.
2.6 STAINLESS STEEL COUNTEROPS
A. Fabricate with Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 304.
B. Minimum gauge of 13 (.09375 inches)
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 6
2.7 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate casework to dimensions, profiles and details shown. Conform to
minimum thicknesses noted in sections above. All cases to be square, plumb and true;
cabinet parts shall be accurately machined and bored for premium grade quality joinery
construction using automatic machinery to assure consistent sizing of modular
components.
B. Lamination of surfacing to core materials shall be under controlled conditions, by approved
and regulated laminating methods to assure a premium lamination, using natural setting
hybrid PVA Type III water resistant adhesives that cure through chemical reaction,
containing no health or environmentally hazardous ingredients.
C. Sub-base: Ladder type construction of water resistant exterior grade plywood with
concealed fastening to cabinet bottom; cabinet body sides shall not extend to floor. Where
indicated on the drawings, provide cut outs for toe grilles, and maintain full ventilation
space beneath cabinets to permit air circulation.
D. Cabinet Bottoms: Exposed wall cabinet bottoms to be pressure-fused white laminate both
sides. Assembly devices to be concealed on bottom side of wall cabinets.
E. Cabinet Tops: Solid sub-tops to be furnished for all base, wall, and tall cabinets. In addition,
wall and tall cabinet to have sloping tops with closed ends, finished to match cabinet faces.
F. Cabinet Ends: Provide flush interior surface with holes drilled for adjustable shelving
supports at 1-1/4-inch vertical centers. Exposed exterior cabinet ends to be laminated with
high-pressure plastic laminate, balanced with high-pressure cabinet liner on interior
surfaces. Front edge to be flush with door and drawer faces and edged with 3 mm PVC
edging. End panels to be doweled to receive bottom and top.
G. Fixed and Adjustable Shelves: Provide flat edge PVC edging at rear and sides of
adjustable shelves and at exposed edges of fixed shelves. Provide solid hardwood front
edge ½” thick x 1 ¼”.
H. Cabinet Backs:
1. Cabinet back to be fully housed into sides, top, and bottom, recessed 7/8 inches from
cabinet rear. Rear, unexposed side of back to receive a continuous bead of hot melt
adhesive at joint between back and sides, top and bottom.
2. Hang rails shall be glued to rear of cabinet back and mechanically fastened to
cabinet sides. Provide minimum of two at base, two at wall, and three at tall
cabinets.
3. Exposed exterior backs to be high-pressure laminate balanced with high-pressure
cabinet liner.
I. Door and Drawer Fronts:
1. Laminated door and drawer fronts to be 13/16 inches thick. Drawer fronts and
hinged doors are to inset between the cabinet end panels, with a nominal 1/16-inch
reveal maintained between pairs of doors, between doors and drawer front, between
door and end panel, and between multiple drawer fronts within the cabinet. Door and
drawer edges to be edged with 3 mm PVC edging.
2. Stile and rail doors to be 13/16 inches thick with safety glazing and extruded vinyl
glazing beads to cover all exposed edges of lite opening.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 7
J. Drawers:
1. Drawer fronts shall be applied to separate drawer body component sub-front.
2. Drawer sides shall be dadoed and glued to receive front and back, machine squared
and held together under pressure while hot melt glued and pinned together.
3. Drawer bottom to be housed into front, sides and back. Underside of drawer to
receive continuous bead of hot melt adhesive at joint between bottom and back,
sides and front for sealing and rigidity. Reinforce drawer bottoms with 1/2-inch-thick
x 4-inch front to back intermediate underbody stiffeners, hot melt glued and fastened;
one at 24 inches, two at 36 inches, and four at 48 inches.
4. Paper storage drawers to be fitted with full width hood at back.
K. Vertical and Horizontal Dividers: Pressure fused laminate in 3/4-inch thickness secured in
cabinet with molded plastic clips or dowels.
L. Door/Drawer Front Rail: Provide minimum 3/4-inch x 6-inch x full cabinet width body rails
immediately behind door/drawer and multiple drawer horizontal joints to maintain exact
body dimensions, close off reveal, and to be located for lock strikes.
M. Base Cabinet Fillers: Provide matching fillers of same construction and color as cabinet
faces at ends of base cabinets as required to extend face of cabinets to walls. Extend
countertops and splashes to walls or to lap end panels at exposed cabinet ends.
N. Wall Cabinet Fillers: Provide matching fillers of same construction and color as cabinet
faces at ends of wall cabinets as required to extend face of cabinets to walls. Provide
matching top and bottom fillers of same construction and color as cabinet tops and bottoms
at ends of wall cabinets as required to extend tops and bottoms of cabinets to walls.
O. Provide removable back panels and closure panels for access to plumbing and electrical
items.
P. Locks: Provide cabinet locks as indicated on drawings.
Q. Stainless Steel Metal Counter Tops:
1. Fabricate up to 12 feet long in one piece, including nosing, backs and ends.
2. When counter tops exceed 12 feet in length accurately fitted field joints are acceptable.
3. Finish thickness at edges 1-1/4 inch.
4. Reinforced with minimum 0.0598 inch thick hat channel stiffeners, minimum of two
stiffeners for units without sinks and three stiffeners for units with sinks welded or
soldered to underside of top full length, except at sink openings.
5. Apply sound deadening material on underside.
6. Flange edges of tops down 1-1/4 inch and reinforce with concealed hardwood or with a
steel frame.
7. Grind welds smooth and finished on exposed surfaces to match finish specified.
8. Stainless Steel Counter or Sink Tops:
a. Where noted stainless steel except where specified for nourishment unit, unit
kitchen, and medicine cabinet.
b. Use 13 gauge (0.09375 inch) thick stainless steel.
c. Depth of splash backs and splash ends one inch and turned down at least 1/2 inch at
wall. Where faucets are located in splash backs, fabricate depth of splash backs 2
inches with provision made to receive required fixture.
d. Where sinks occur fabricate top with 3/16 inch marine edge and fit flush with
adjacent tops of other materials.
e. Weld sink flush to counter top and finish to appear seamless.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Examine the job site and the conditions under which the work of this Section is to be
performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed
with the work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Coordinate with Divisions 22, 23 and 26 for utility connections.
C. Condition casework to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation area prior to
commencing installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install casework with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces using concealed
shims. Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide
filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match casework face.
B. Install casework without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessories as
indicated.
C. Install casework and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8-inch in 8 feet.
D. Fasten unit of casework to adjacent unit and into structural support members of wall
construction with #10 sheet metal or wood screws with washer head or washer.
E. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks in base units into underside of
countertop. Align adjacent surfaces. Form seams 1/8-inch-wide and adhere with
manufacturer's recommended joint adhesive in color to match countertop.
F. Install window sills plumb to a tolerance of 1/8-inch in 8 feet.
1. Fasten window sills per manufacturers written instructions.
G. Install specialty items in strict compliance with manufacturer’s written installation
instructions.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and lubricate to provide
unencumbered operation.
B. Clean casework and glass on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-
applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06 4023
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
BITUMINOUS DAMPROOFING 07 1113 - 1
SECTION 07 1113 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Substrate preparation.
2. Bituminous dampproofing.
3. Edge and penetration detailing material.
1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver dampproofing materials to project site in factory-sealed containers.
B. Store materials in dry, well-ventilated space.
1.3 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Install dampproofing only when site weather conditions are acceptable per
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Ventilation: Provide sufficient ventilation during application and curing of
dampproofing to prevent buildup of toxic or flammable fumes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING MATERIALS
A. Cold-Applied Cut-Back Semimastic Asphalt: Solvent-based asphaltic dampproofing
mastic of brushing (medium) consistency, fibrated, meeting the requirements of ASTM
D 2823, Type I; asbestos free.
2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Reinforcing Fabric: Woven or nonwoven glass fiber, treated with organic binders and
coated for compatibility with dampproofing bitumen.
B. Detailing Mastic: Asphalt-based plastic roof cement, trowel consistency, meeting the
requirements of ASTM D 4586.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are smooth, sound, clean, and dry, and that elements which will
penetrate dampproofing have been completed and are rigidly installed.
3.2 PREPARATION
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
BITUMINOUS DAMPROOFING 07 1113 - 2
A. Remove honeycomb, aggregate pockets, fins, ridges, and projecting rough areas.
B. Fill cracks, holes, depressions, and irregularities with latex patching mortar or detailing
mastic as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
C. Form fillets (cants) at inside corners and around projecting elements using latex
patching mortar or detailing mastic.
3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Comply with dampproofing manufacturer's instructions for handling, preparation,
application, and protection of dampproofing materials.
B. Provide dampproofing at all exterior foundation walls.
3.4 BELOW-GRADE DAMPPROOFING
A. Form flashings at outside corners, changes in plane, and penetrations. Apply coating
of dampproofing or detailing mastic, embed layer of fiberglass reinforcing extending at
least 12 inches onto dampproofing surface, and topcoat with another layer of
dampproofing or detailing mastic.
B. Apply a uniform coat of semimastic dampproofing using spray applicator, brush, or
mop. Coverage, 4-1/2 to 5-1/2 gallons per 100 square feet to provide minimum 30-mil
dry film thickness.
C. Apply a "touch-up" coating over areas where coating is thin or has not formed a
smooth lustrous surface.
D. Apply second coat of dampproofing as specified above.
3.5 INSPECTION
A. Before covering or backfilling dampproofing, notify the architect that the dampproofing
is ready for inspection.
3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Take measures required to protect completed dampproofing after installation.
B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent surfaces using cleaning agents and
procedures recommended by the manufacturer of the surface.
END OF SECTION 07 1113
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100 - 1
SECTION 07 2100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install loose-fill insulation as described in Contract Documents.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Product Data:
a. Manufacturer’s literature describing products to be used, showing
compliance with specified requirements.
b. Manufacturer’s storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
c. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals:
1. Insulation shall be manufactured to be in compliance with International Code
Council (IBC) or other applicable building codes.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements:
1. Materials shall be delivered in original, unopened packages with labels intact.
a. Labels to identify reference standards, type and class as applicable,
minimum net weight of insulation, coverage, “R” values, and required
warning statements.
B. Storage And Handling Requirements:
1. Protect from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled, or covered with ice
or snow.
2. Provide dry location with adequate ventilation for storage, not subject to open
flames or sparks, and permitting easy access for inspection and handling.
3. Store materials in dry locations with adequate ventilation, free from water, and in
such a manner to permit easy access for inspection and handling
4. Comply with Manufacturer’s recommendations for handling, storage, and
personal protection during installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Insulation:
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Certainteed Corp, Valley Forge, PA www.certainteed.com.
2) FiberTEK, Salt Lake City, UT www.fibertekinsulation.com.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100 - 2
3) Guardian Fiberglass, Greer, SC www.guardianbp.com.
4) Johns Manville, Denver, CO www.jm.com.
5) Knauf Fiber Glass, Shelbyville, IN www.knaufusa.com.
6) Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation, Toledo, OH www.owens-
corning.com.
b. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Division 1.
B. Materials:
1. Loose-Fill Insulation:
a. Blown Insulation:
1) Fiber glass.
2) Comply with requirements of ASTM C764, Type I or II, non-combustible
when tested in accordance with ASTM E136.
b. 'R' Factor Required:
1) Order insulation by 'R' factor rather than 'U' factor, rating, or thickness.
a) Attic/Truss Space: R65.
b) Exterior Walls: R21, fill stud cavity full
c) Interior Walls: Varies, fill stud cavity full
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification Of Conditions:
1. Inspection:
a. Examine substrate and verify framing is suitable for installation of insulation:
b. Verify that mechanical and electrical services have been installed and tested
and, if appropriate, verify that adjacent materials are dry and ready to
receive insulation.
1) Notify Architect of unsuitable conditions in writing.
2) Do not install insulation over unsuitable conditions.
3) Commencement of Work by installer is considered acceptance of
substrate.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Install in insulation in sufficient depth to provide thermal value specified after
settlement of insulation.
3. Do not blow insulation into electrical devices and vents.
4. Provide minimum clearance around recessed lighting fixtures as approved by
local code.
5. Install baffles between trusses and rafters at ventilation spaces to prevent
insulation from blocking airflow from soffit.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Inspections:
1. Insulation meets required thickness requirements.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100 - 3
B. Non-Conforming Work: Non-conforming work as covered in the General Conditions
applies, but is not limited to the following:
1. Correct any work found defective or not complying with contract document
requirements at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until project completion.
B. Repair or replace damaged products.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Waste Management:
1. Disposal of rubbish, debris, and packaging materials in approved manner.
END OF SECTION 07 2100
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
METAL PANELS 07 4113 - 1
SECTION 07 4113 METAL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes batten-seam metal roof panels.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied color
finishes.
1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged
or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and
surface damage.
C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight
and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for
drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause
staining, denting, or other surface damage.
D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
METAL PANELS 07 4113 - 2
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers'
written instructions and warranty requirements.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with
actual equipment provided.
B. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of
soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of metal panel systems that fails in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-
applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 2140.
B. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for
wind-uplift-resistance class indicated.
1. Uplift Rating: UL 90.
C. FM Global Listing: Provide metal roof panels and component materials that comply with
requirements in FM Global 4471 as part of a panel roofing system and that are listed in FM
Global's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify
materials with FM Global markings.
1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-105.
2. Hail Resistance: MH.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
METAL PANELS 07 4113 - 3
2.2 BATTEN-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panel assembly designed to be installed by
covering vertical side edges of adjacent panels with battens and mechanically attaching
panels to supports using concealed clips. Include battens and accessories required for
weathertight installation.
B. Wide-Profile, Snap-on-Batten-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel
edges and a flat pan between ribs; designed for independent installation by mechanically
attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located between panels, engaging the
opposite edge of adjacent panels, and installing snap-on battens over panel joints.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to
the following:
a. AEP Span; A BlueScope Steel Company.
b. Architectural Building Components.
c. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation.
d. PAC-CLAD; Petersen Aluminum Corporation
2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel
sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation;
structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with
ASTM A 755/A 755M.
a. Nominal Thickness: 0.028 inch.
b. Exterior Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer.
c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
3. Batten Material: Same material, finish, and color as roof panels.
4. Clips: Two-piece floating to accommodate thermal movement.
a. Material: 0.064-inch nominal thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) or aluminum-
zinc alloy-coated steel sheet.
5. Panel Coverage: 18 inches.
6. Batten Height: 1.0 inch to 1.5 inches.
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Underlayment: Provide self-adhering, cold-applied, sheet
underlayment, a minimum of 30 mils thick, specifically designed to withstand high metal
temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment
manufacturer.
1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F; ASTM D 1970.
2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to the following:
1) CertainTeed Corporation.
2) Owens Corning.
B. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645; cold-formed, metallic-coated
steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M,
Class AZ50 aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
METAL PANELS 07 4113 - 4
manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel
system.
B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system
including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants,
gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal
panels.
2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from
material recommended by manufacturer.
3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam
or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch thick, flexible closure strips; cut
or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or
necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as
required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but
are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers.
Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.
D. Gutters: Formed from same material as roof panels, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes,
and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long sections, of size
and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Furnish
gutter supports spaced a maximum of 36 inches o.c., fabricated from same metal as gutters.
Provide wire ball strainers of compatible metal at outlets. Finish gutters to match roof fascia
and rake trim.
E. Downspouts: Formed from same material as roof panels. Fabricate in 10-foot long sections,
complete with formed elbows and offsets, of size and metal thickness according to
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Finish downspouts to match gutters.
F. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed
fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-
applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.
G. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible
with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.
1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound
sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag,
nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type,
grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain
weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's
standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance
requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with
dimensional and structural requirements.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
METAL PANELS 07 4113 - 5
B. On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels
may be fabricated on-site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if panels are of
same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed panels. Fabricate
according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown.
C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length
of panel.
D. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that
provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from
movements.
E. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's
recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed
edges folded back to form hems.
2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams
and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-
lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate
sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards.
5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are
not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal
panel manufacturer.
a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or
metal roof panel manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of
metal being secured.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of other components
are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or
installed to minimize contrast.
C. Steel Panels and Accessories:
1. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than
70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare,
pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
manufacturers' written instructions.
2. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-
colored acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with
a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
METAL PANELS 07 4113 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
1. Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles,
channels, and other structural panel support members and anchorages have been
installed within alignment tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer.
2. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing
or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof
panel manufacturer.
a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or
backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual
locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support
members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written
recommendations.
3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with
temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply at locations
indicated below, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less
than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2
inches. Extend underlayment into gutter trough. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment
within 14 days.
1. Apply over the entire roof surface.
2. Apply over the roof area indicated below:
a. Roof perimeter for a distance up from eaves of 36 inches beyond interior wall
line.
b. Valleys, from lowest point to highest point, for a distance on each side of 24
inches. Overlap ends of sheets not less than 6 inches.
c. Rake edges for a distance of 24 inches.
d. Hips and ridges for a distance on each side of 18 inches.
e. Roof-to-wall intersections for a distance from wall of 24 inches.
f. Around dormers, chimneys, skylights, and other penetrating elements for a
distance from element of 18 inches.
B. Slip Sheet: Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels.
C. Flashings: Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in
Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
METAL PANELS 07 4113 - 7
3.4 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation,
sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless
otherwise indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels.
2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping
screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings that
will be concealed by metal panels are installed.
3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds.
6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel
splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
7. Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws.
Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping
screws.
8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.
B. Fasteners:
1. Steel Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use
galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
C. Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place,
using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written instructions.
D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect
against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
E. Batten-Seam Metal Roof Panel Installation: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with
concealed clips at each batten-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners
recommended by manufacturer.
1. Install clips to supports with self-drilling fasteners.
2. Apply battens to metal roof panel seams, fully engaged to provide weathertight joints.
3. Watertight Installation:
a. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal joints of metal panels, using
sealant or tape as recommend by manufacturer as needed to make panels
watertight.
b. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and
accessories.
c. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with sealant
and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.
F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and
weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with
flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, copings,
corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar
items. Provide types indicated by metal panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide
types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
METAL PANELS 07 4113 - 8
G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written
installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide
concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level. Install work with
laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.
1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is
true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install
sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof and weather-
resistant performance.
2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches
of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would
not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of
intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant
(concealed within joints).
H. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters
to eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 36 inches o.c. using manufacturer's
standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for
thermal expansion.
I. Downspouts: Join sections with telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold
downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at
approximately 60 inches o.c. in between.
1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building.
2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.
3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch
in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces
and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are
installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal
panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 07 4113
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
VINYL SIDING 07 4640-1
SECTION 07 4640 – VINYL SIDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Vinyl siding, Polymer shake and shingle siding.
B. Vinyl soffits.
C. Accessories and trim.
1.2 DESIGN/PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Code compliance in accordance with the following:
1. IBC
2. ICC Evaluation Service
3. CCMC
B. PVC Fire Resistance: Provide vinyl siding products that meet or exceed the following ratings:
1. Flame Spread Index < 25, smoke development rating <450, per ASTM E 84.
2. Fire endurance classification of 1 hour, per ASTM E 119 in a wall assembly.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 01.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips
representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 12
inches (300 mm) long, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Provide installer with not less than three years of experience with
products specified or has obtained 5-Star Green Contractor (Preferred), 5-Star Contractor
(preferred), or Master Craftsman credentials from CertainTeed.
B. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of installation techniques and workmanship.
1. Finish areas designated by Architect.
2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship and color is approved by
Architect.
3. Reinstall mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
VINYL SIDING 07 4640-2
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Refer to
manufacturer’s installation instructions for specific storage and handling requirements.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's standard lifetime limited warranty on siding products, transferable to
new owners.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: CertainTeed Corporation, Siding Products Group, 20 Moores
Road, Malvern, Pennsylvania 19355. Tel: (800) 233-8990; Email:
salessupportgroup@certainteed.com; Web: www.certainteed.com.
B. Substitutions: Products of equal or better quality as determined by the Architect may be
substituted.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Vinyl Siding, Soffit and Components: Provide products made of extruded polyvinyl chloride as
specified in this section and manufactured to comply with requirements of ASTM D 3679.
1. Provide elongated nailing slots on nailing flanges to allow for movement.
2. Factory-notch ends of horizontal panels to form overlapping joints.
3. Provide products that meet weathering requirements of ASTM D 3679.
2.3 VINYL SIDING
A. Restoration Classic D4.5 (smooth):
1. Design: Double 4.5 inch (114 mm) clapboard smooth finish with STUDfinder
Installation System.
2. Nail Hem: RigidForm 180 Technology Roll Over Nail Hem.
3. Lock: DuraLock post formed lock design.
4. Width: 9 inches (229 mm) plus or minus .062 inch (1.57 mm).
5. Length: 12 feet 1 inch (3.68 m) plus or minus .025 inch (6 mm).
6. Average Thickness: 0.044 inch (1.1 mm).
7. Panel Projection: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
8. Exposure: 4.5 inches (114 mm) with single nailing hem.
9. Maximum Warp (per 2 panels): 0.250 inch (6 mm).
10. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standards.
11. Color shall be as follows: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full color range.
1.2 VINYL CARPENTRY SOFFITS
A. Universal T4 soffit, fully vented.
1. Design: Triple 4 inches (102 mm); fully vented, matte finish.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
VINYL SIDING 07 4640-3
2. Width: 12 inches (305 mm) plus or minus .062 inch (1.57 mm).
3. Length: 12 feet (3.66 m) plus or minus) .025 inch (6 mm).
4. Average Thickness: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm).
5. Exposure: 4 inches (102 mm) single nailing hem.
6. Maximum Warp (per 2 panels): 0.250 inch (6 mm).
7. Ventilation: 5.85 sq. inches per sq. ft.
8. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standards.
9. Color shall be as follows: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full color range.
B. Soffit Accessories:
1. J-Channel: 3/8 inch (10 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm), 5/8” (16 mm) and 3/4 inch (19 mm)
by 12 feet, 6 inch (3.81 m) length, for vertical and eave applications.
2. F-Channel: 5/8 inch (15.88 mm) and 3/4 inch (19 mm) by 12 feet 6 inches (3.81 m)
length.
3. Soffit H-Bar: 3/8 inch (10 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) or 3/4 inch (19 mm) by 12 feet, 6
inches (3.81 m) length, for horizontal and eave applications.
4. Soffit Cove Trim: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) by 12 feet, 6 inches (3.81 m) length.
5. Color: .
1.3 VINYL CARPENTRY ACCESSORIES
A. Standard Accessories:
1. Corner post: Standard width, 10 feet (3.05 m), 12 feet (3.66 m), and 20 feet (6.10 m)
lengths.
2. J-Channel: Standard width, 12 feet, 6 inches (3.81 m) length.
3. Undersill trim: ¾” face, 12 feet, 6 inch (3.81 m) length.
4. Dual undersill trim: ¾” face, 12 feet 6 inches (3.81 m) length.
5. 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) Metal Starter Strip. (No Color)
6. 2-1/4 inch (57 mm) Vinyl Starter Strip. (No Color)
7. Color: refer to CTS002 for color availability of accessories
B. 1-1/4 Inch Pocket Accessories:
1. Cornerpost: Standard width, 10 feet; (3.05 m) length.
2. J-Channel: Standard width, 12 feet, 6 inches (3.81 m) length.
3. Traditional SuperCorner: 5.5 (140 mm) inches by 20 feet (140 mm by 6.1 m) length.
4. Inside Cornerpost; Standard width, 10 feet (3.05 m) length.
5. 3-1/2 inch (89 mm) Lineal by 20 feet (6.09 m) length.
6. Starter Strip: 3 inches (76 mm) by 12 feet, 6 inches (3.81) m length.
7. Band Board: 7-1/4” (184 mm) width by 16’8” (5.08m) length
8. Finish Board: 3-1/2” (88.9mm) width by 12’6” 3.81 m) length
9. Color: refer to CTS002 for color availability of accessories
C. Optional Accessories:
1. 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) Window and Door Casing.
2. 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) Vinyl Starter Strip.
3. Color: refer to CTS002 for color availability of accessories.
1.4 FASTENERS
A. A. Provide galvanized or other corrosion-resistant nails as recommended by manufacturer of
siding products.
PART 2 EXECUTION
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
VINYL SIDING 07 4640-4
2.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
2.2 PREPARATION
A. Examine, clean, and repair as necessary any substrate conditions which would be
detrimental to proper installation.
B. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
2.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with the latest printed instructions of the manufacturer.
B. Installer should have current 5-Star Contractor (preferred) or Master Craftsman credentials.
C. Install products with all components true and plumb.
D. For Vinyl Siding: Nail horizontal panels by placing nail in center of slot. Nail vertical panels by
placing first nail at top of top slot and remaining nails in center of slots. Drive nails straight,
leaving 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) space between nail head and flange of panel.
E. Allow space between both ends of siding panels and trim for thermal movement. Overlap
horizontal panel ends one-half the width of factory pre-cut notches.
F. Stagger lap joints in horizontal siding in uniform pattern as successive courses of siding are
installed.
G. Install J-channel and flashing to accommodate successive courses of vertical siding. Install
wood shims at building corners to bring cut edges of vertical siding out to correct plane.
2.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
2.5 CLEANING
A. At completion of work, remove debris caused by siding installation from project site.
END OF SECTION 07 4640
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 1
SECTION 07 6200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories:
1. Copings.
2. Metal flashing and counterflashing.
3. Reglets.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Division 04 Sections for through-wall flashing and other integral masonry
flashings specified as part of masonry work.
2. Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment
supports, roof hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units.
3. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric sealants.
4. Division 07 Roofing Sections for flashing and roofing accessories installed
integral with roofing membrane as part of roofing-system work.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural
movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing.
B. Fabricate and install flashings at roof edges to comply with recommendations of FM
Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for the following wind zone:
1. Wind Zone 2: Wind pressures of 31 to 45 psf.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions,
and general recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated
product.
C. Shop Drawings of each item specified showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and
anchorage details.
D. Samples of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory items, in the specified finish.
Where finish involves normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets
composed of 2 or more units showing the full range of variations expected.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 2
1. 8-inch-square Samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished
surfaces.
2. 12-inch-long Samples of factory-fabricated products exposed as finished Work.
Provide complete with specified factory finish.
3. Samples for color selection.
E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and
other information specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience Installer who has completed sheet
metal flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for
this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper
sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of
Work, and protection of materials and finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, G 90, commercial quality, or ASTM A 527, G
90, lock-forming quality, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with 0.20 percent copper, mill
phosphatized where indicated for painting; not less than 0.0396-inch thick, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167, Type 304, soft annealed, with No. 2D finish, minimum 24
gauge.
2.2 REGLETS
A. General: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure
interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces and compatible with flashing
indicated.
B. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with
neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at
top edge.
C. Flexible Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure
flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal
counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing.
D. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before
counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of the counterflashing lower edge.
1. Material: Galvanized steel, 24 gauge.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 3
E. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include the following:
1. Fry Reglet Corporation.
2. Hickman: W.P. Hickman Co.
3. Keystone Flashing Company.
2.3 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
A. Comply with SMACNA “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” for all applications.
B. Gutters: Profiles and size as indicated on Drawings, minimum 22 gage sheet metal.
C. Downspouts: 2 ½” diameter galvanized steel pipe.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, used with rosin flux.
B. Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as
recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with
material being fastened.
C. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur
and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.
D. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating
sealant.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and
fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint
sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,
recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior and interior nonmoving joints,
including riveted joints.
G. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof
and weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal.
H. Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb/square red rosin, sized building paper conforming to FS UU-B-
790, Type I, Style 1b.
I. Polyethylene Underlayment: ASTM D 4397, minimum 6-mil-thick black polyethylene
film, resistant to decay when tested according to ASTM E 154.
J. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar
accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with
material being installed; noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance.
K. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 4
2.5 SELF-ADHERING MEMBRANE
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include the following:
1. WinterGuard; CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Bituthene Ice and Water Shield; Grace: W.R. Grace & Co.
3. Nordshield Ice and WaterGard; Nord Bitumi US, Inc.
4. Polyguard Deck Guard; Polyguard Products, Inc.
5. Moisture Guard; Tamko Asphalt Products, Inc.
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply
with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to
the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated.
B. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates
and result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify
shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
C. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back
to form hems.
D. Factory fabricate coping corners with mitered, fully-welded joints, both horizontal and
vertical.
E. Expansion Provisions: Space lapped movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no
joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Behind lapped joints use 8-
inch-wide backer plates of same gauge and profile as coping.
F. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate
elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.
G. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by covering
concealed surfaces at locations of contact with self-adhering membrane.
H. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are
not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view.
I. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal
component being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by
sheet metal manufacturer.
1. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for
application but never less than one gauge heavier than metal being secured.
2.7 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. General: Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with
performance requirements but not less than that listed below for each application and
metal.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 5
B. Copings, Caps, Fascia, Misc. Metal Wrap:
1. Fabricate from 22-gauge galvanized steel.
C. Scuppers, Flashings, Counterflashing, Roof-Penetration Flashing:
1. Fabricate from 22-gauge galvanized steel.
D. Roof-Penetration Flashing Draw Bands:
1. Fabricate from 24-gauge stainless steel.
2.8 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISH
A. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: Apply the following system on galvanized
steel sheet as recommended by coating manufacturers and applicator.
1. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat,
thermocured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and
fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene
fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2.
a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from coating manufacturer's full
range of color and gloss.
b. Resin Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
fluoropolymer coating systems containing resins produced by one of the
following manufacturers:
1) Ausimont USA, Inc. (Hylar 5000)
2) Elf Atochem North America, Inc. (Kynar 500)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be
installed and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply
with performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of Work securely in place
by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps,
joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof.
B. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back
to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in
waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of
surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 6
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work.
Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches
of corner or intersection. Set ends of coping units on a bead of sealant applied to joint
backer sheet.
D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate
elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form
metal to completely conceal sealant.
1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered.
E. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by
coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with self-adhering membrane.
1. Underlayment: Where installing steel, stainless steel or aluminum directly on
cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of self-adhering membrane
underlayment.
F. Counterflashings: Coordinate installation of counterflashings with installation of
assemblies to be protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashings in reglets or
receivers. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and
sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded seam, or blind rivets and sealant.
Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 inches and bed with sealant.
G. Roof-Drainage System: Install drainage items fabricated from sheet metal, with
anchors recommended by SMACNA's Manual or the item manufacturer, to drain roof in
the most efficient manner. Coordinate roof-drain flashing installation with roofing
system installation.
H. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate equipment support flashing installation with
roofing and equipment installation. Weld or seal flashing to equipment support
member.
I. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to
recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49.
1. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleats anchored to
substrate at 24 inch centers.
J. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in
FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49.
1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleats anchored to
substrate at 16 inch centers.
2. Anchor interior leg of coping with screw fasteners and washers at 16 inch
centers.
K. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with
installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows:
1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping
with flashing.
2. Seal with sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for lead
flashing on vent piping.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 7
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of
metal or deterioration of finishes.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and
trim Work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural
weathering at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 07 6200
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
JOINT SEALANT 07 9200 - 1
SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified
by reference to this Section:
1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces:
a. Joints between different exposed materials.
b. Perimeter joints between siding and frames of doors and windows.
c. Other joints as indicated.
2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings.
c. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
e. Other joints as indicated.
4. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Control joints in tile flooring.
b. Other joints as indicated.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and
water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured
sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint
sealants in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
JOINT SEALANT 07 9200 - 2
E. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by
SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and
other information specified.
G. Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation
methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction
testing specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application. Include information
specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.
I. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the
following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and
substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
J. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply with
requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations.
K. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint
sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and
whose work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful
in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life,
curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to
prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures,
contaminants, or other causes.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the
following conditions:
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
JOINT SEALANT 07 9200 - 3
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted
by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 40 degrees F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint
widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications
indicated.
C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until
contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner
of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor
under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or
replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other
requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by elastomeric sealant
manufacturer agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those
that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section
within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
D. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric
joint sealants from the following:
1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant
manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression
caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design
specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other
atmospheric contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in the
sealant schedules at the end of Part 3.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
JOINT SEALANT 07 9200 - 4
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range for this characteristic.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements
indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric
Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses.
B. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in
the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when
tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719,
to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at the time of
installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses
indicated.
C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified in the
Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide
products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained
porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
D. Continuous-Immersion-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants
will be immersed continuously in water, provide products that have undergone testing
according to ASTM C 1247, including initial six-week immersion period and additional
immersion periods specified below, and have not failed in adhesion or cohesion when
tested with substrates indicated for Project.
1. Three additional four-week immersion periods.
E. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints
that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with
21 CFR 177.2600.
2.4 SOLVENT-RELEASE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acrylic-Based Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 1311 for
each product of this description indicated in the Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant
Schedule at the end of Part 3.
B. Butyl-Rubber-Based Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Standard: Comply with
ASTM C 1085 for each product of this description indicated in the Solvent-Release
Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
JOINT SEALANT 07 9200 - 5
C. Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant: For each product of this description indicated in the
Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3 provide manufacturer's
standard, solvent-release-curing, pigmented, synthetic-rubber sealant complying with
AAMA 803.3 and formulated for sealing joints 3/16 inch or smaller in width.
2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description
indicated in the Latex Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3.
2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are
compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are
approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience
and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and
density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant
performance:
1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin.
2. Type O: Open-cell material.
3. Type B: Bicellular material with a surface skin.
4. Type: Any material indicated above.
C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing
complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of
remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 degrees F. Provide products
with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control
sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.
D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials
or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure.
Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.7 COMPRESSION SEALS
A. Preformed seals shall be multicellular extruded elastomeric seals with continuous
internal baffles. Seals shall be designed to be installed without frames or anchoring
flanges.
1. Color: Selected from manufacturer’s standard colors.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for
adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction
joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of
sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
JOINT SEALANT 07 9200 - 6
capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any
way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting joint-sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants
to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following
requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with
adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective
coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant
manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents,
water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning,
mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean,
sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants.
Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming
or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include
the following:
a. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not
stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of
joint sealants.
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant
manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written
instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or
migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
JOINT SEALANT 07 9200 - 7
contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape
immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for
products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use
of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of
ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to
materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant
application and replace them with dry materials.
E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used
between sealants and back of joints.
F. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability.
G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning
or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to
ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that
do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses
by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint
sealants and of products in which joints occur.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
JOINT SEALANT 07 9200 - 8
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes
so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged
or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are
indistinguishable from the original work.
3.6 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Low-Modulus Nonacid-Curing Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are
indicated, provide products complying with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. 790; Dow Corning.
b. Silpruf; GE Silicones.
c. UltraPruf SCS2300; GE Silicones.
d. HiFlex 331; NUCO Industries, Inc.
e. NuFlex 309; NUCO Industries, Inc.
f. VP 275; Ohio Sealants, Inc.
g. 864; Pecora Corporation.
h. 890; Pecora Corporation.
i. PSI-641; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
j. Omniseal; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc.
k. Spectrem 1; Tremco.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Additional Movement Capability: 50 percent movement in extension and 50
percent movement in compression for a total of 100 percent movement.
5. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
6. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, O.
7. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per
ASTM C 1248.
8. Applications: Use in joints bordering on plastic.
B. Medium-Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type
are indicated, provide products complying with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. 791; Dow Corning.
b. 795; Dow Corning.
c. HiFlex 393; NUCO Industries, Inc.
d. PSI-631; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
e. SM5731 Poly-Glaze; Schnee-Morehead, Inc.
f. SM5733 Poly-Glaze; Schnee-Morehead, Inc.
g. Spectrem 2; Tremco.
h. Tremsil 600; Tremco.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
JOINT SEALANT 07 9200 - 9
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, O.
a. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum
coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, and ceramic tile.
6. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per
ASTM C 1248.
7. Applications: Joints which border on glass.
C. Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are
indicated, provide products complying with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. Vulkem 922; Mameco International.
b. Dynatrol II; Pecora Corporation.
c. Flexiprene 2000; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
d. Sikaflex - 2c NS; Sika Corporation.
e. DYmeric 240FC; Tremco.
2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Additional Movement Capability: 50 percent movement in extension and 50
percent in compression for a total of 100 percent movement.
5. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
6. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, O.
7. Applications: Exterior joints and interior expansion and control joints.
D. Multicomponent Pourable Urethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are
indicated, provide products complying with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. Chem-Calk 550; Bostik Inc.
b. Vulkem 245; Mameco International.
c. Vulkem 255; Mameco International.
d. Pourthane; W.R. Meadows, Inc.
e. Elasto-Thane 920 Pourable; Pacific Polymers, Inc.
f. NR-200 Urexpan; Pecora Corporation.
g. NR-300 Urexpan, Type M; Pecora Corporation.
h. PSI-270SL; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
i. PSI-551/RC-2; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
j. Sikaflex - 2c SL; Sika Corporation.
k. SL 2; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc.
l. THC-900; Tremco.
m. THC-901; Tremco.
2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and P (pourable).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, O.
6. Applications: Horizontal joints in sidewalks.
E. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated,
provide products formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing interior ceramic
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
JOINT SEALANT 07 9200 - 10
tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of
high humidity and temperature extremes, and that comply with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. 786 Mildew Resistant; Dow Corning.
b. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones.
c. NuFlex 302; NUCO Industries, Inc.
d. 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant; Pecora Corporation.
e. PSI-611; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
f. Tremsil 200 White; Tremco.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, O.
6. Applications: Use in joints in interior wet areas and around plumbing fixtures.
3.7 LATEX JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Latex Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products
complying with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. Chem-Calk 600; Bostik Inc.
b. NuFlex 330; NUCO Industries, Inc.
c. LC 160 All Purpose Acrylic Caulk; Ohio Sealants, Inc.
d. AC-20; Pecora Corporation.
e. PSI-701; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
f. Sonolac; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc.
g. Tremflex 834; Tremco.
2. Applications: Interior joints other than control joints.
END OF SECTION 07 9200
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1103 - 1
SECTION 08 1103 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel doors and frames.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in
ANSI A250.8, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both
uncoated steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel sheets.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation,
type, level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label
compliance, fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Elevations of each door design.
2. Details of doors including vertical and horizontal edge details.
3. Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles.
4. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
5. Details of each different wall opening condition.
6. Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections.
7. Coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during
transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of
factory-finished doors and frames.
B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if
damage is found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match
new work and are acceptable to Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that
cannot be repaired as directed.
C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch-
high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could
create a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1103 - 2
immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to permit air
circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. Steel Doors and Frames:
a. Amweld Building Products, Inc.
b. Benchmark Commercial Doors; a division of General Products Co., Inc.
c. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company.
d. Curries Company.
e. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free
of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or
ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of
flatness.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B,
with an A40 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating; stretcher-leveled standard of
flatness.
D. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Class B coating; mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications;
stretcher-leveled standard of flatness where used for face sheets.
E. Stainless Steel Sheets: ASTM A 666, austenitic stainless steel, Type 316.
2.3 DOORS
A. General: Provide doors of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated.
B. Interior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by
referencing ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance
level:
1. Level 4 and Physical Performance Level A (Maximum Duty), Model 2
(Seamless).
C. Exterior Doors: Provide stainless steel doors complying with requirements indicated
below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for
physical-endurance level:
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1103 - 3
1. Level 4 and Physical Performance Level A (Maximum Duty), Model 2
(Seamless).
D. Vision Lite Systems: Manufacturer's standard kits consisting of glass lite moldings to
accommodate glass thickness and size of vision lite indicated.
2.4 FRAMES
A. General: Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and
other openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and
profile. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Frames of 0.067-inch-thick steel sheet for Level 4 steel doors. Exterior frames shall be
stainless steel
C. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three
silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of
double-door frames.
D. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.016-inch-thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes
to close off interior of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or
other materials might obstruct hardware operation.
E. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042-inch-thick, electrolytic
zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.
F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items
are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as
applicable.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be
rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where
practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that
cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly
at Project site.
B. Exterior Door Construction: For exterior locations and elsewhere as indicated,
fabricate doors, panels, and frames from steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of
doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of 0.067-inch-thick,
metallic-coated steel channels with channel webs placed even with top and bottom
edges.
C. Interior Door Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors from cold-rolled steel sheet.
D. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces a door
complying with SDI standards.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1103 - 4
E. Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8-inch at jambs and heads,
except not more than 1/4-inch between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4-inch at
bottom.
F. Single-Acting, Door-Edge Profile: Square edge.
G. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel
Doors and Frames."
H. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings
from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
I. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval
heads for exposed screws and bolts.
J. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown
or scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame
assemblies and tested according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable
door assemblies.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-value of
0.24 Btu/sq. ft. x h x degrees F or better.
K. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed
hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by
hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and
ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.
1. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcement, and
provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable.
L. Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and
seamless face joints.
M. Provide welded frames with temporary spreader bars.
N. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping
for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site.
O. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to
ANSI A250.8.
P. Glazing Stops: Manufacturer's standard, formed from 0.032-inch-thick steel sheet.
1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of
interior doors for glass.
2. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass.
Q. Astragals: As required by NFPA 80 to provide fire ratings indicated.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1103 - 5
2.6 FINISHES
A. General: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer
complying with ANSI A250.10 for acceptance criteria.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings,
manufacturer's data, and as specified.
B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set
frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and
spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
1. Place frames before construction of enclosing walls and ceilings.
2. In metal-stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install
adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike
jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws.
C. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in
frames, within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with
SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A115.1G.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or
damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer.
B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings
from doors and frames.
END OF SECTION 08 1103
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 3310 - 1
SECTION 08 3310 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of overhead coiling doors:
1. Overhead Coiling Door.
2. Coiling Service Counter Door
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Operation-Cycle Requirements: Design overhead coiling door components and
operator to operate for not less than 50,000 cycles and 500 drop tests.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. Include
details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components,
profiles, and finishes. Provide roughing-in diagrams, operating instructions, and
maintenance information. Include the following:
1. Setting drawings, templates, and installation instructions for built-in or embedded
anchor devices.
2. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.
B. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed
in manufacturer's data sheets.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems.
Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring and
between components provided by door manufacturer and those provided by
others.
C. Qualification Data: Installer shall have 5 years minimum experience.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and
approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors through one source from a single
manufacturer that has been in the business of and have experience in manufacturing
the type of product covered under this specification section as well as giving credible
service for a minimum of five (5) years.
1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling door manufacturer.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Door Warranty: Furnish one (1) year written warranty signed by the manufacturer and
installer agreeing to repair or replace work which has failed as a result of defects in
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 3310 - 2
materials or workmanship. Upon notification within the warranty period, such defects
shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Basis of design is McKeon Door Company. Subject to
compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Cookson Company.
2. Cornell Iron Works Inc.
3. Overhead Door Corp.
4. Raynor.
2.2 COILING INSULATED SERVICE DOORS
A. Basis of Design is McKeon Door Company “IS3020D-M-PC”. Door shall be designed to
provide a R-value of 8.70 and a U-value of 0.11.
B. Curtain: Curtain: Shall be assembled of interlocking galvanized steel slats. Slats shall
have end-locks locking each end of all alternate slats to act as a wearing surface, and
maintain slat alignment. Curtain shall be formed of 20 gauge front and back panel
slats. The void of the curtain slats shall be filled with thermal insulation and the front
and back panel slats must have a positive interlock. Slats with snap-in back panels are
not acceptable.
1. Slats: Shall be of a cross section not less than 3” wide by 1-7/16” deep.
C. Bottom Bar: Shall consist of two (2) angles, each not less than 2" x 2" x 1/8" steel
formed to fit slats.
D. Guides: Each guide assembly shall be fabricated of a minimum 4" x 4" steel support
angle, a 3" x 4" inner guide angle and a 4" x 4" outer guide angle. Provide neoprene
weather seals extending the full height of both guides.
E. Mounting Brackets: Fabricated of hot rolled 3/16” steel plate minimum, brackets shall
be provided to house ends of the counterbalance barrel assembly.
F. Hood: Shall be provided to entirely enclose curtain and counterbalance barrel as-
sembly. Hood shall be fabricated 22 gauge galvanized steel and designed to match
brackets. Top and bottom shall be bent and reinforced for stiffness. Provide internal
neoprene air baffle to minimize air infiltration at the head.
G. Counterbalance Assembly: Coiling insulated service door shall be counterbalanced by
means of adjustable steel helical torsion springs attached to shaft enclosed in pipe
with required mounting blocks or rings for attachment of curtain. Grease sealed bear-
ings or self-lubricating graphite bearings shall be attached to the spring barrel which
shall be fabricated of hot formed structural quality carbon steel seamless pipe.
H. Electric Motor Operator: Coiling insulated service door shall be provided with a com-
pact power unit designed and built by the coiling insulated service door manufacturer.
Operator shall be equipped with an adjustable screw-type limit switch to break the cir-
cuit at termination of travel. High efficiency gearing running in an oil bath, shall be fur-
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 3310 - 3
nished together with a magnetic operated brake, completely housed to protect against
damage, dust and moisture. An efficient overload protection device, which will break
the power circuit and protect against damage to the motor windings shall be integral
with the unit. Operator is to be housed in a NEMA type 1 enclosure.
1. Motor: Shall be intermediate duty, thermally protected, ball bearing type with
a class A or better insulation. Horsepower of motor is to be 1/2hp minimum or
of manufacturer's recommended size, whichever is greater, and shall start, ac-
celerate, and operate door in either direction from any position at a speed not
less than 8-inches per second, but not more than 12-inches per second.
2. Starter: Shall be size "0" magnetic reversing starter, across the line type with
mechanical and electrical interlocks, with 10 amp continuous rating and 24 volt
control circuit.
3. Reducer: Spiral gear type, 70% efficiency minimum.
4. Brake: Magnetically activated, integral within the operator's housing.
5. Keyed Control Station: Provide flush mounted exterior keyed control station
marked “open, close and stop”.
I. Obstruction Sensing Device: The coiling insulated service door shall be designed with
an obstruction sensing safety edge. In the event that the safety edge meets an ob-
struction during the normal closing operation, the coiling insulated service door shall
stop, reverse and return to the open position.
J. Locking Device: Equip door with locking device assembly, locking bars, operable with
inside and outside with cylinders. Cylinders furnished under door hardware.
H. Finish: After completion of fabrication, clean all metal surfaces to remove dirt and
chemically treat to provide for powder coat adhesion. Provide powder coat finish of
color as selected by architect from manufacturer’s standard RAL powder coat selection
chart. Shall be assembled of interlocking galvanized steel slats, cold rolled. Slats shall
have end-locks locking each end of alternate slats to act as a wearing surface and
maintain slat alignment. Curtain shall be 22 gauge minimum.
1. Slats: Shall be of a cross section not less than 1¼” wide by ½” deep. Slat
galvanizing shall be of a hot process with a high grade zinc coating (minimum
1.25 oz. per square-foot).
2.3 COILING SERVICE COUNTER DOOR
A. Basis of Design is McKeon Door Company “CS3000-HK-PC”.
B. Curtain: Shall be assembled of interlocking galvanized steel slats, cold rolled. Slats
shall have endlocks locking each end of alternate slats to act as a wearing surface and
maintain slat alignment. Curtain shall be 22 gauge minimum.
1. Slats: Shall be of a cross section not less than 1¼” wide by ½” deep. Slat
galvanizing shall be of a hot process with a high grade zinc coating (minimum
1.25 oz. per square-foot).
C. Bottom Bar: Shall consist of single angle not less than 1½” x 1½” steel formed to fit
slats. Provide slide lock mechanisms with hasps on both jambs to allow for locking.
D. Guides: Each guide assembly shall be fabricated of a minimum 1/8” steel angles and
channels formed to a box type configuration.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 3310 - 4
E. Brackets: Mounting brackets of hot rolled 1/8” steel plate shall be provided to house
ends of the counterbalance barrel assembly.
F. Hood: Shall be provided to entirely enclose curtain and counterbalance assembly.
Hood shall be fabricated of 22 gauge galvanized steel and designed to match brackets.
Top and bottom shall be bent and reinforced for stiffness.
G. Counterbalance Assembly: Shutter shall be counterbalanced by means of adjustable
steel helical torsion springs attached to shaft enclosed in pipe with required mounting
blocks or rings for attachment of curtain. Grease sealed bearings or self-lubricating
graphite bearings shall be attached to the spring barrel which shall be fabricated of hot
formed structural quality carbon steel seamless pipe.
H. Hand Crank Operator: Shutter shall be provided with a compact reduction geared
mechanism designed and built by the shutter manufacturer. The mechanism shall not
require more than 35 pounds of operational force to move the shutter in either
direction.
I. Finish: After completion of fabrication, clean all metal surfaces to remove dirt and
chemically treat to provide for powder coat adhesion. Provide powder coat finish of
color as selected by architect from manufacturers RAL powder coat selection chart.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces and field conditions to which this work is to be performed and notify
architect if conditions of surfaces exist which are detrimental to proper installation and
timely completion of work.
B. Verify all dimensions taken at job site affecting the work. Notify the architect in any in-
stance where dimensions vary.
C. Coordinate and schedule work under this section with work of other sections so as not to
delay job progress.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Perform installation using only factory approved representatives of the door manufactur-
er.
B. Install door assemblies at locations shown in perfect alignment and elevation, plumb,
level, straight and true.
C. Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearances and smooth non-binding operation.
D. Install wiring in accordance with applicable local codes and the National Electrical Code
Standard. Materials shall be UL listed.
E. Test door closing sequence when activated by the building's fire alarm system. Reset
door after successful test.
3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 3310 - 5
A. Protect installed work using adequate and suitable means during and after installation
until accepted by owner.
B. Remove, repair or replace materials which have been damaged in any way.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp,
twist, or distortion and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter.
B. Adjust doors at final acceptance and 90-days after final acceptance during off hours of
building use.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform
startup services and to train Owner's maintenance personnel.
END OF SECTION 08 3310
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
THERMALLY IMPROVED ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 5110 - 1
SECTION 08 5110 THERMALLY IMPROVED ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid and tubular aluminum extruded windows of the following type(s):
Picture Window
Casement
B. Related Sections:
1. Fixed windows
2. Operable windows
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit following items:
1. Product Data.
2. Shop Drawings: Include window schedule, window elevations, sections and details,
and multiple window assembly details.
3. Samples:
a. Color samples: Minimum 1x4 inch (25x100 mm) samples of Aluminum with
painted or anodized color.
b. Glass, see glazing specification.
4. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:
a. Qualifications: Proof of manufacturer's qualifications.
b. U-Factor and structural rating charts required for AAMA and NFRC labeling
requirements.
c. Installation Instructions – AAMA 2400 (“Mounting Flange Installation”)
B. Closeout Submittals: Reference Division 01 – Closeout Submittals; submit following items:
1. Maintenance instructions.
2. Special Warranties.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Overall Standards: Comply with ANSI/AAMA 101.I.S.2, except as otherwise noted herein.
B. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer Qualifications:
a. Minimum five years experience in producing aluminum windows of the
type(s) specified.
b. Member AAMA, NFRC.
C. Certifications for insulated glass windows:
1. AAMA: Windows shall be Gold Label certified with label attached to frame per AAMA
requirements.
2. NFRC: Windows shall be NFRC certified with temporary U-factor label applied to
glass and an NFRC tab added to permanent AAMA frame label.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Follow manufacturer’s instructions on label applied to windows.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
THERMALLY IMPROVED ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 5110 - 2
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Commercial Special Warranty:
1. 10-year guarantee.
2. Guarantee windows against defects in manufacturing and workmanship including
costs for parts and labor.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 BASIS OF DESIGN:
A. Milgard Manufacturing, Inc.
B. Window Series: Milgard TIE Aluminum Windows
C. Substitution: Products of other manufacturer’s deemed equal to or better than the basis of
design will be considered for substitution by the Architect.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Comply with requirements of AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-05, 6063-T5
temper for strength, corrosion resistance and application of required finish.
B. Extruded frame members are to be .060” in thickness for structural walls.
2.03 GENERAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A. Thermal Performance: Comply with NFRC 100.
B. Air Leakage, Water Resistance, Structural Test: Comply with ANSI/AAMA 101/I.S.2.
C. Forced-Entry Resistance: Comply with ASTM E 588.
2.04 WINDOW TYPES:
A. Picture Window nail fin setback:
1. Frame: 920 Series, 2 ¼” (57mm)
2. Sightlines: 920 Series, equal to 1 ¼”
3. Performance Class: 920 & 921 Series, 95 ½” x 71 ½” and smaller: F-HC45
D. Casement nail fin setback
1. Frame: 920 Series, 2 ¼” (57mm)
2. Sash: Depth of 1 1/2” (38mm), solid aluminum extrusion.
3. Performance Class:
a. 95 ½” x 59 ½” Double Casement with center fixed, 36 vent set: C-C30.
4. Hardware:
a. Cam style locking mechanism with latch on jamb.
b. Tension adjustable hinge.
5. Weatherstripping: Dual durometer vinyl bulb seal.
2.06 INSECT SCREENS
A. Provide tight-fitting screen for operating sash with hardware to allow easy removal.
1. Screen Cloth: Charcoal colored fiberglass mesh.
2. Frame:
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
THERMALLY IMPROVED ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 5110 - 3
a. Cambered formed aluminum with rigid plastic corner keys.
b. Pull tabs for removal.
2.08 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate frames and sash with mechanically joined corners. Corners are fastened with
corrosion resistant screws and sealed with an acrylic sealant.
C. All fixed glass is exterior glazed and all sashes are marine glazed with flexible PVC glazing.
The fixed glazing shall be removed without disassembly of a sash. The vents will need to be
disassembled to replace the glazing.
2.09 FINISHES
A. Frame and Sash Color: Anodized Exterior Finish: As selected by Architect from
manufacturer’s standard colors.
B. Color match screen frame to window frame and sash color.
2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Windows inspected in accordance with manufacturer’s Quality Control Program as required
by AAMA Gold Label certification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings in which windows will be installed.
1. Verify that framing complies with AAMA 2400 (“Mounting Flange Installation”) or
AAMA 2410 (“Flush Fin Installation”).
2. Verify that fasteners in framed walls are fully driven and will not interfere with window
installation.
B. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install windows in framed walls in accordance with AAMA 2400 (“Mounting Flange
Installation”) or AAMA 2410 (“Flush Fin Installation”).
B. Do not remove temporary labels.
C. Install insect screens on operable sash.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Reference Division 01 – Cleaning and Waste Management.
B. Remove temporary labels and retain for Closeout Submittals.
C. Clean soiled surfaces and glass using a mild detergent and warm water solution with soft,
clean cloths.
END OF SECTION 08 5110
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 1
SECTION 08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Work under this section includes the complete finish hardware requirements for the
project. Quantities listed are for the Contractor's convenience only and are not
guaranteed. Items not specifically mentioned, but necessary to complete the work
shall be furnished, matching the items specified in quality and finish.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Standards:
1. CABO/ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Building and Facilities
2. ANSI/BHMA A156.18 - Materials and Finishes
3. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Windows
4. Underwriters Laboratories - Building Materials Directory
5. UL 10C - Underwriters Laboratories, “Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door
Assemblies”
B. Codes:
1. ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act, “Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings
and Facilities”
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General Requirements: All Submittals shall be in accordance with Division 01,
Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Electronic copy of manufacturer's data for each item of finish hardware
C. Hardware Schedule: Submit electronic copy of a detailed Finish Hardware Schedule.
1. The submitted Finish Hardware Schedule shall indicate the complete designation
of every item required for each door or opening.
2. Furnish cover sheet listing title of project as shown on the Contract Documents,
name, address, phone and fax numbers of Owner, Architect, Contractor, and
Supplier, name of Certified Hardware Consultant, and date of submittal.
3. List each opening individually under separate headings in the same order as the
door schedule. Do not group doors with like or similar hardware under a single
heading, or continue headings on separate pages.
4. Each heading shall indicate opening location, handing, degree of opening, door
size, type, fire rating, and Door and Frame material.
5. Indicate product Manufacturer and incorporate cross-reference to symbols used
in Article 2.15 Hardware Schedule.
6. Include locations for all miscellaneous items, including cabinet locks.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 2
7. A cross reference for any abbreviations or symbols used shall be included.
8. Schedules in coded or horizontal format are unacceptable. Submittals not
conforming to these requirements will be returned without review, for re-
submittal. Following is an example of the required format:
1 Sgl. Door #104A - Corridor 102 from Waiting 104
RHR 90º 3-0 x 7-0 x 1-3/4” x 20 Minute x Type D
SC WD x HMF
3 Each Butts (B2) MC TA714 US26D (652) 4.5 x 4.5 x 1/2MS
1 Lockset (L4) BE 35H7J15M 630 RHR
1 Door Closer (C2) LCN 4041-EDA Alum. (689) x SB
1 Kick Plate (K2) TI B4EKP – 10 x 34.5 - US32D (.050)
1 Wall Stop (S1) TR 1270CX-SV US26D (626)
1 Set Smoke Gasket (W1) PE S88D - 17’ per Set
D. Processing: Hardware schedules will not be reviewed by the Architect until they have
been reviewed and approved by Contractor. Resubmit only corrected copies of those
sheets requiring correction and update distributed copies with corrected sheets.
E. Modifications: The Finish Hardware Submittal shall be kept current throughout the
project duration. All revisions incorporated shall be submitted in accordance with the
above requirements. Submit only cover sheet and revised pages. All revisions shall
clearly identify changes from previous submittal content.
F. Samples: If requested by the Architect, submit one (1) sample of each exposed
hardware category, finished as required, and tagged with full description for
coordination with the hardware schedule. Samples will be reviewed, by the Architect,
for design and finish only, compliance with other requirements is the responsibility of
the Contractor. Units which are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal
procedures may be used on the project.
G. Color Samples: Submit Six (6) set of color charts and physical samples of each
product requiring color selection.
H. Key Schedule: Submit Three (3) copies of keying schedule for approval. The schedule
shall include door number, location, lock function, keying layout, and quantity of keys.
Deliver two copies of approved keying chart, complete with key number, with keys.
I. Operations and Maintenance Data.
1. Submittals: Submit Maintenance and Operations Manuals under provisions of
Division 01, Close-Out Procedures.
2. Content: Manuals shall contain final copy of the Finish Hardware Submittal,
product data, templates, Key Schedule, parts lists and diagrams, installation and
maintenance instructions, and wiring diagrams.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supplier: Finish hardware shall be supplied by a recognized builders' hardware supplier
who has been furnishing hardware in the same area as the project for a period of not
less than five (5) years. They shall be a factory direct, authorized distributor of the Exit
Devices, Locksets and Door Closers. The supplier's organization shall include an
Architectural Hardware Consultant, certified by the Door and Hardware Institute, who is
available at all reasonable times during the course of the work to meet with the Owner,
Architect or Contractor for project hardware consultation.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 3
B. Source: Obtain each kind of Hardware (Butts, Locksets, Exit Devices, Door Closers,
etc.) from only one manufacturer.
C. Templates: Furnish hardware templates for each fabricator of doors, frames and other
work to be factory prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request, check the
shop drawings of such other work to confirm that provisions will be made for the proper
installation of hardware.
D. Installer: Finish hardware shall be installed only by experienced tradesmen in
compliance with trade union jurisdictions, either at the door and frame fabrication plant
or at the project site.
E. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Code Compliance: All finish hardware shall comply with applicable local and/or
state building codes. All finish hardware shall meet the requirements of ADAAG,
and CABO/ANSI A117.1, Accessible and Usable Building and Facilities.
2. Product Compliance: Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by
a recognized testing agency for the types and sizes of doors required, and which
complies with the requirements of the door and door frame labels. Provide Door
Closers, Automatic self latching bolts, coordinators, gasketing, astragals, or other
components if required to conform to label requirements.
1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Packaging: Each item or package is to be separately tagged with identification related
to the final hardware schedule. Complete installation instructions shall be included in
the packages.
B. Storage: Provide a locked room at the jobsite for the storage of the hardware.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Submittal: Submit Warrantees in accordance with Section 01740, Warrantees.
B. Coverage: Finish hardware shall be guaranteed against defects in workmanship and
operation for a period of one (1) year, backed by a factory guarantee of the hardware
manufacturer. The following products shall be guaranteed for periods beyond One (1)
Year:
1. Door Closers - Ten (10) Years
2. Panic Devices - Three (3) Years
3. Automatic Door Operators/Closers – Two (2) Years
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Special Tools: Provide Two (2) Set of Special Tools required for Installation and
Adjustment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Products may be furnished by the manufacturers listed under “As
Specified” in hardware schedule.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 4
1. Manufacturer Abbreviations
a. Hager HAG
b. Ives IVE
c. LCN LCN
d. McKinney MCK
e. National Guard Products NGP
f. Norton NOR
g. Pemko PEM
h. Rixon RIX
i. Rockwood ROC
j. Schlage SCH
k. Von Duprin VON
2.2 HARDWARE MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Fasteners: Provide fasteners for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips
head fasteners, countersunk oval, flat head, or undercut head as appropriate for
material to be installed.
B. Compatibility: Provide fasteners which are compatible with both unit fastened and
substrate, and which will not cause corrosion or deterioration of hardware, base
material, or fastener.
2.3 HARDWARE FINISHES
A. General: Unless specifically indicated otherwise, provide architectural hardware in the
following finishes.
1. Finish in general shall be: US26D (BHMA 626), Satin Chrome Plated, except:
2. Interior Hinges: US26D (BHMA 652), Satin Chrome plated over steel.
3. Locksets, Exit Devices, Push Plates, Door Pulls, Overhead Stops, and Exterior
Butts: US32D (BHMA 630), Satin Stainless Steel
4. Door Closers and Removable Mullions: Painted Aluminum (BHMA 689)
5. Kick Plates: .050 Satin Stainless Steel.
6. Smoke Gasketing: As Selected.
7. Threshold, Weatherstrip & Door Bottoms: As listed
2.4 BUTTS AND CONTINUOUS HINGES
A. Types: Types required as indicated in Hardware Schedule.
1. Quantity (per Leaf):
a. Door openings up to 60”: 2 Each
b. Door openings 60 to 90”: 3 Each
c. Doors over 90”: Furnish one (1) additional for each 30" increment or
fraction thereof.
2. Pins: Hinges shall have non-removable pins (NRP - Set Screw in Barrel).
3. Width: Width of Hinges shall be as required to clear projecting trim or other
conditions to allow maximum degree of opening.
4. Tips: Hinges shall have Flush Tips.
5. Non-Standard Sizes: For unusual size or weight doors, furnish type, size and
quantity recommended by the hinge manufacturer.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 5
2.5 LOCKSETS AND CYLINDERS
A. Types: Types required as indicated in Hardware Schedule,
1. Lever Design: Furnish all Locksets and Latches in design noted in hardware
schedules.
2. Backset: 2-3/4"
3. Ratings: All Locksets and Latchsets shall be listed with Underwriters
Laboratories for A label and lesser class doors.
4. Cylinders: Furnish all Locksets and Cylinders with Key Removable
Interchangeable Cores.
5. Knurling: Provide Knurled Lever where Lock Symbol is suffixed with “K” in the
Hardware Schedule.
6. Strikes: Provide Curved Lip Strikes with adequate projection to protect door trim.
Provide flat, flush lip strikes for pairs of doors with overlapping Astragals.
7. Strike Boxes: Provide manufacturers standard wrought or plastic strike boxes.
2.6 DOOR CLOSERS
A. Types: Types required as indicated in Hardware Schedule, and as described below.
1. Pair Openings: Furnish Two (2) Door Closers for pair openings.
2. Drop Plates: Furnish drop plates where doors have insufficient top rails, or
where Regular Arm Door Closers are used in conjunction with Concealed
Overhead Stops.
3. Fluid: Furnish cold weather fluid, at exterior & vestibule doors. Furnish non-
flammable fluid at fire rated openings in conformance with UBC Standard 7-2
1997.
4. Voltage: Coordinate voltage and location requirements for Electronic Door
Closers with Electrical Contractor.
5. Spacer Blocks: Furnish Spacer Blocks where frame stop does not provide for
adequate support for the parallel arm soffit shoe.
6. Special Mounting: Provide special closer mounting as required where
interference with weatherstrip or sound seals occurs.
2.7 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Types: Types required as indicated in Hardware Schedule,
1. Pair Openings: Furnish Two (2) Stops for Pair openings.
2. Size: Furnish Overhead Stop and Holders sized as recommended by
Manufacturer.
3. Special Applications: Furnish Overhead Stop and Holders with Special Shims,
Brackets, or Special Template mounting where required.
4. Voltage: Coordinate voltage and location requirements for Magnetic Holders with
Electrical Sub-Contractor.
5. Site Conditions: Where wall stops are not applicable, furnish floor stops, or
overhead stops if required.
2.8 THRESHOLDS
A. Types: Types required as indicated in Hardware Schedule,
1. Fasteners: Furnish all Thresholds with #10 Phillips Head Stainless Steel
Machine Screws and Lead Anchors.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 6
2.9 WEATHERSTRIP AND SMOKE GASKETING
A. Types: Types required as indicated in Hardware Schedule, and as described below
1. Weatherstrip and Seals: Furnish weatherstrip and gaskets for complete perimeter
of opening, including mullions, and astragals. Furnish weatherstrip at sill of Four
(4) sided frames.
2. Rain Drips: Rain Drips shall be full opening width including frame faces.
2.10 DOOR SILENCERS
A. General: Furnish Rubber Door Silencers for all openings
B. Quantity: Furnish three (3) for each single door frame, and four (4) for each pair of
door frames.
2.11 KEYING
A. Types: All Locksets and Cylinders for this project shall be keyed to the existing Schlage
Primus Everest Grand Master Key System for the City of Rexburg All Keyed
products specified under this Section (Locksets, Cylinders, Deadlocks, etc.) shall be
keyed to the system.
B. Construction Keying: Provide Temporary Brass Construction Cores and Keys for all
interchangeable core type cylinders during the construction period. Plastic Construction
Cores are unacceptable.
C. Key Conference: The Finish Hardware Supplier shall meet with the Owner to prepare
the permanent keying schedule. . Submit Key Schedule for approval in accordance
with paragraph 1.4 H.
D. Installation: The Permanent Cores, Master Keys, Change Keys, and Control Keys,
prepared according to the approved keying schedule, shall be transmitted directly to
the Owner, prior to substantial completion. The General Contractor shall remove the
construction cores and install the permanent cores. All Construction Cores shall be
returned to the Finish Hardware Supplier.
E. Transmittal: All Permanent Cores and Keys shall be sent direct from the lock
manufacturer via Registered Mail, Return Receipt Requested, to the Owner.
F. Key Transcript: Provide a key Transcript list of all cylinders, including 25% additional
change combinations.
G. Stamping: Stamp all Keys “Do not Duplicate” and with change designation as directed.
H. Key Quantities: Furnish the following Key Quantities:
1. Two (2) change keys per Lockset or Cylinder.
2. One (1) Control Keys
3. One (1) Construction Control Keys
4. Two (2) Construction Keys
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Examination: Examine Doors, Frames, and related items for conditions that would
prevent the proper application of the Finish Hardware. Do not proceed until defects are
corrected.
B. Blocking: Provide solid blocking for all wall stops and magnetic holders.
C. Fasteners: Check all conditions and use fastening devices as needed to securely
anchor all hardware as per manufacturer's published templates. Self-tapping sheet
metal screws are not acceptable.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mounting Heights: Mount units at heights as recommended in
"Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames" by Doors and Hardware Institute, except as indicated below. Products not
specifically covered shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers templates
and instructions.
1. Hinges:
a. Top Hinge: 7-1/4”, Top of frame rabbet to centerline of hinge.
b. Bottom Hinge: 12-1/4”, Bottom of Frame to centerline of hinge
c. Intermediate Hinges: Centered, equal spacing between top and bottom
hinges.
2. Mortise Lock Strikes: 40”, bottom of frame to centerline of Strike.
3. Deadlocks: 48”, bottom of frame to centerline of Cylinder.
4. Wall Stops: Locate Wall Stops intended for use with Lever Handle Locksets and
Exit Devices at the Centerline of the Spindle or Pull.
B. Installation: Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Cutting and Fitting: Wherever cutting and fitting are required to install hardware
surfaces which will be painted or finished at a later time, install each item
completely and then remove and store in a secure place. After completion of the
finishes, re-install each item.
2. Door and Frame Finishes: Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes
have been completed on the substrate.
3. Fire Rated Openings: Install in accordance with NFPA 80.
4. Exit Devices: Trim Exit Devices to provide 1-1/2” clearance between End Cap
and hinge jamb stop face and/or stop applied weatherstrip.
5. Door Closers: Door Closer shall be located to allow maximum degree of opening
that project conditions will allow. Door Closer shall not be used to stop the door,
except for models equipped with an integral stop-on-the-arm feature.
6. Overhead Stops: Furnish Overhead Stop and Holders with maximum degree of
opening that project conditions will allow.
7. Floor Stops: Locate Floors Stops at maximum degree of opening that project
conditions will allow. Do not locate Floor Stops where they create a hazardous
condition. Stops should be located no more than 1/3 Door width from the latch
edge of the Door.
8. Thresholds: Set all Exterior Thresholds in a bed of butyl rubber sealant in
conformance with Division 7 requirements. Remove all excess sealant. Caulk all
edges and joints to exclude moisture.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 8
9. Weatherstrip: Weatherstrip shall be installed to provide a continuous seal at
head and jambs. Do not notch Weatherstrip for Door Closer shoe.
C. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to
insure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be
adjusted to operate freely and smoothly.
3.3 FINAL ADJUSTMENT
A. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one (1) month
prior to acceptance or occupancy, make a final check and adjustment of all hardware
items during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy. Clean and lubricate
operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and
doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and
ventilating equipment.
B. Door Closer Adjustment: After mechanical systems have been balanced, adjust Door
Closers to comply with following CABO/ANSI A117.1 Requirements.
1. Closing Speed: With the door open 70 degrees, the door closer shall be
adjusted so that the door will take at least three (3) seconds to move to a point
where the leading edge of the door is three inches from latching.
2. Opening Force: The maximum force for pushing or pulling a door open shall be
as follows: (these forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or
disengage other devices securing the door)
a. Fire Doors: The minimum opening force allowable by the appropriate
administrative authority.
b. Exterior Doors: 8.5 lbf.
c. Interior Doors: 5.0 lbf.
C. Instruction: Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of
hardware and hardware finishes.
END OF SECTION 08 7100
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
GLAZING 08 8000 - 1
SECTION 08 8000 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including
those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by
reference to this Section:
1. Windows.
2. Doors.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement
and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass
breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and
installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration
of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only.
Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions.
Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not
less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or
exceed the following criteria:
1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with
ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements:
C. Specified Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from
basic wind speed of 100 miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE 7,
"Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.4.2, "Analytic
Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings.
1. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set
vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action.
a. Load Duration: 60 seconds or less.
2. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all
four edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind
pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1-inch, whichever is less.
a. For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads.
b. For insulating glass.
3. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6 mm.
D. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting
from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
GLAZING 08 8000 - 2
acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering
calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees F, material
surfaces.
E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance
properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined
according to procedures indicated below:
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick.
2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick and
a nominal 1/2-inch-wide interspace.
3. Center-of-Glass U-Values: NFRC 100 methodology using LBL-35298
WINDOW 4.1 computer program, expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F.
4. Center-of-Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology using
LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program.
5. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted
in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who
employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass
Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3
(Master Glaziers).
B. Source Limitations for Clear Glass: Obtain clear float glass from one primary-glass
manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations for Insulating Glass: Obtain insulating-glass units from one
manufacturer using the same type of glass and other components for each type of unit
indicated.
D. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one
source for each product and installation method indicated.
E. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals"
Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products.
1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the
experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented
according to ASTM E 548.
2. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency accredited
according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
GLAZING 08 8000 - 3
F. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in
16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with
certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product
manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are
indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this
Section or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual" and "Laminated Glass Design
Guide."
H. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at
least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following
inspecting and testing agency:
1. Insulating Glass Certification Council.
2. Associated Laboratories, Inc.
3. National Accreditation and Management Institute.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as
needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation,
temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers
and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other
causes.
1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature
conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below
40 degrees F.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner
of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor
under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Source Limitations for Coated Glass: Obtain coated glass from one manufacturer for
each type of coating and each type and class of float glass indicated.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
GLAZING 08 8000 - 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products indicated in
schedules at the end of Part 3.PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3.
2.3 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS
A. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion
parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3
(glazing select); class, kind, and condition as indicated in schedules at the end of
Part 3.
2.4 INSULATING GLASS
A. Insulating-Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass
separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA
units and with requirements specified in this Article and in the Insulating-Glass
Schedule at the end of Part 3.
1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass
where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of
individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in
"Performance Requirements" Article.
2. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is indicated.
B. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated in the
Insulating-Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3 are nominal and the overall thicknesses
of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge.
C. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows:
D. Manufacturer's standard sealants.
E. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction
complying with the following requirements:
1. Aluminum with mill or clear-anodized finish, or stainless steel.
2. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.
3. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction.
2.5 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following
requirements:
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
GLAZING 08 8000 - 5
1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and
with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of
insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturer’s written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions
existing at time of installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range for this characteristic.
B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other
requirements indicated for each liquid-applied, chemically curing sealant in the Glazing
Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses.
1. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is
specified in the Glazing Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability,
when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per
ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width
existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements
in ASTM C 920 for uses indicated.
2.6 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a
solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous
surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass
manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper
backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated
below:
1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to
continuous pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed-cell, PVC foam tape; factory coated with
adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive;
and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full
bead of liquid sealant.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced
glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials
for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces
contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket
manufacturer.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
GLAZING 08 8000 - 6
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer
hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation
indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement
(side walking).
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of
size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum
glazing sealant performance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness,
and offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep system.
3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before
glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants,
gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated,
including those in referenced glazing publications.
B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on
glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with
reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged
glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass
with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and
impair performance and appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined
by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
GLAZING 08 8000 - 7
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin
course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass
lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches as
follows:
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of
glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances,
unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to
maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance
requirements.
2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to
sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final
compressed thickness of tape.
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant
or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out
when installation is subjected to movement.
K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner
recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal
corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges
are 1/8-inch below sightlines of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch
tapes to make them fit opening.
C. Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and
sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by
applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not
lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.
F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
GLAZING 08 8000 - 8
G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by
inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against
faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward
centers of openings.
H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3.5 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing,
between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent
sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants
cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth
of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting
or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface.
Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating
substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as
recommended by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry
surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for
build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass
manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in
any way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction
period.
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days
before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion.
Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.
3.7 INSULATING-GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Low-E Insulating Glass: For all exterior windows, provide low-emissivity
insulating-glass units complying with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. “Solarban 60 (2) Starphire” by PPG Glass Technology or approved equal.
2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 25 and 6 mm.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
GLAZING 08 8000 - 9
3. Interspace Content: Argon.
4. Indoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) float glass.
a. Annealed.
5. Outdoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat) float glass.
a. Class 1 (clear).
b. Annealed.
6. Low-Emissivity Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second surface.
7. Visible Light Transmittance: 73 - 74%.
8. Winter Nighttime U-Value: 0.28 - 0.30.
9. Summer Daytime U-Value: 0.27 - 0.29.
10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.39 - 0.43.
11. Outdoor Visible Reflectance: 11 - 13.
B. Tempered, Low-E Insulating Glass: For exterior doors and storefronts, provide
low-emissivity, tempered insulating-glass units complying with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. “Solarban 60 (2) Starphire” by PPG Glass Technology or approved equal.
2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 25 and 6 mm.
3. Interspace Content: Argon.
4. Indoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) float glass.
a. Annealed.
5. Outdoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat) float glass.
a. Class 1 (clear).
b. Annealed.
6. Low-Emissivity Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second surface.
7. Visible Light Transmittance: 73 - 74%.
8. Winter Nighttime U-Value: 0.28 - 0.30.
9. Summer Daytime U-Value: 0.27 - 0.29.
10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.39 - 0.43.
11. Outdoor Visible Reflectance: 11 - 13.
3.8 GLAZING SEALANT
A. Medium-Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant GS-#1: Where glazing
sealants of this designation are indicated, provide products complying with the
following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. 795; Dow Corning.
b. PSI-631; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
c. Spectrem 2; Tremco.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing
substrates indicated, O.
6. Applications: General glazing applications.
END OF SECTION 08 8000
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 1
SECTION 09 2900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Priming of interior gypsum board prior to texturing
2. Interior gypsum board.
3. Texturing of gypsum board.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum
board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage
from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and
other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. Gypsum Board and Related Products:
a. American Gypsum Co.
b. G-P Gypsum Corp.
c. National Gypsum Company.
d. United States Gypsum Co.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 2
2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints
in each area and correspond with support system indicated.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36.
1. Type X:
a. Thickness: 5/8-inch.
b. Long Edges: Tapered.
c. Location: Where indicated and where required for fire-resistance-rated
assembly.
2. Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630.
a. Standard type, except as otherwise indicated.
b. Edges: Tapered, for taped joint treatment.
2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
b. LC-Bead (J-Bead): Use at exposed panel edges.
c. L-Bead: Use where edge of panel is inaccessible.
d. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated or specified.
2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.
3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping
compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints,
fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim
accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 smooth texture finish, use setting-type,
sandable topping compound.
2.5 TEXTURING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products by manufacturer of gypsum boards; comply with
manufacturer’s recommendations for specific project conditions.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 3
B. Texture: Smooth face
2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards
and manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls:
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),
nonperforated.
C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: As specified in Division 7 Section “Building Insulation”.
D. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
E. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section “Building Insulation.”
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-
metal frames, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are
readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
1. Where sound attenuation blankets do not fully fill the wall cavity, support the
blankets mechanically with wire or galvanized sheet metal straps.
C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end
joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger
abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at
edges and ends with not more than 1/16-inch of open space between panels. Do not
force into place.
E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where
intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints.
Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on
opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of
framed openings.
F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached
to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 4
G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
H. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum
panels.
I. Cover both faces of partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above
ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or
smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq.
ft. in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of
floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural
members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant.
J. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments,
except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges
with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints
between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
K. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended in writing by
manufacturer, install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner
construction.
L. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and
expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of
acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters
and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written
recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or
through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical
ceilings.
M. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application
and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications.
N. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c.
O. Moisture Resistant:
1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install with ¼-inch (6.4 mm) gap where
panels abut other construction or penetrations.
a. At sinks
b. At water closets
2. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install standard gypsum wallboard panels to
produce a flat surface expect at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to
receive water-resistant panels.
3.3 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS
A. Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the
greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 5
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing),
unless otherwise required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end
joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate
courses of board.
B. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturers written
instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings and according to
ASTM C 840 (in ceilings exceeding 2,500 square feet in area, and in walls and
partitions with runs exceeding 30 feet).
3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare
gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from
adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not
intended for tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to
ASTM C 840, for locations indicated:
1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and
where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated
assemblies and sound-rated assemblies.
2. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint
compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be
exposed to view.
3. Prior to texturing, but after finish levels have been achieved, apply primer / sealer
to all surfaces schedule to be textured and painted.
a. Approved primer/sealer: Refer to specification Section 09900.
b. Application: Apply primer/sealer at a spread rate recommended by
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.
3.6 TEXTURING
A. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish to produce a uniform texture free of
starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns.
1. Provide smooth finish
B. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive
texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 6
If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately
remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture finish
manufacturer’s written recommendations.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs gypsum board ceilings,
Architect will conduct an above-ceiling observation and report deficiencies in the Work
observed. Do not proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing
until deficiencies have been corrected.
1. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of
Project, will be ready for above-ceiling observation.
2. Before notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum
board ceilings:
a. Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures, powered for operation.
b. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping
systems.
c. Installation of air-duct systems.
d. Installation of air devices.
e. Installation of mechanical system control-air tubing.
f. Installation of ceiling support framing.
END OF SECTION 09 2900
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500 - 1
SECTION 09 6500 - RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Resilient stair treads/riser
2. Resilient sheet flooring.
3. Resilient wall base.
4. Resilient flooring accessories.
5. Moisture & pH control system
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 09 Section "Carpet."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard sample sets consisting of
sections of units showing the full range of colors and patterns available for each type of
product indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard sizes, but not less than 3 inches
long, of each product color and pattern specified.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of resilient products and accessories
certifying that each product furnished complies with requirements.
E. Slab Moisture Test Reports:
1. Provide written report of moisture testing prior to installation of flooring material.
Test using anhydrous calcium chloride, report results indicating pounds of water
transpired per 1000 sq. ft. of area. One test per 1000 Sq Ft of floor surface
(Minimum One (1) test location). Include flooring manufacturer’s
recommendation in pounds of water per 1000 sq. ft. for each type of flooring to
be installed.
F. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance
materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500 - 2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this
Section who has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for
this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and color of product specified from one source
with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties without delaying the Work.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire-test-
response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method
indicated below by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater when tested per ASTM E 648.
2. Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per
ASTM E 662.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and
containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification,
and shipping and handling instructions.
B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures
maintained between 50 and 90 degrees F.
C. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before
installation, unless longer conditioning period is recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 65 degrees F or more than 85 degrees F in
spaces to receive resilient products for at least 48 hours before installation, during
installation, and for at least 48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written
recommendations specify longer time periods. After post installation period, maintain a
temperature of not less than 55 degrees F or more than 95 degrees F.
B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they
are to be installed.
C. For resilient products installed on traffic surfaces, close spaces to traffic during
installation and for time period after installation recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
D. Coordinate resilient product installation with other construction to minimize possibility of
damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. Install resilient products
after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET FLOORING
A. Standard Resilient sheet Flooring:
1. Manufacturers: Provide products complying with the contract documents and
made by one of the following:
a. Basis of Design: Shaw Contract, “Vitality”
b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., “LinoArt”
c. Forbo, “Marmoleum MCS 2.0mm”
2. Roll Width: 79 inches.
3. Thickness: .079 inches.
4. Heat welded seams.
B. Concessions Resilient sheet Flooring:
1. Manufacturers: Provide products complying with the contract documents and
made by one of the following:
a. Basis of Design: Altro Floors, “Reliance 25”
b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., “Safety Zone”
c. Forbo, “Eternal Step – SR”
2. Roll Width: 6’-7”
3. Weight: 6.27 lbs/yd
4. Thickness: 2.5 mm
5. Wear Layer: 0.10”
6. Heat welded seams.
7. Provide with integral coved base with cap strip, coved base height as indicated in
the Drawings.
C. Welding Bead: Solid vinyl strand produced by manufacturer of inlayed vinyl flooring for
heat welding seams.
1. Color: Match field color of sheet flooring.
2.2 RESILIENT STAIR TREADS AND RISER
A. Provide 1- piece rubber stair and riser and accessories as indicated on drawings and as
follows:
1. Basis of Design: Johnsonite “Roundel Rt-Rd” with visually-impaired roundel round
raised disk pattern, one-piece tread/riser combination with a 2-inch wide contrasting
solid rubber color insert.
2. Subject to approval procedures, equivalent products of other manufacturers may
be submitted for approval.
2.3 MOISTURE CONTROL AND pH CONTROL
A. Epoxy-based moisture control system that produces a hard surface
B. Basis of Design: Ardex “MC Rapid
C. Warranty: 10-year
D. Moisture control system shall be applicable to concrete with moisture readings up to
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500 - 4
98% R.H. Once cured, it will reduce moisture emission to level acceptable to flooring
manufacturer.
E. pH Control Basis of Design: Envirosafe Manufacturing / Eco-Ware Inc: “Concrete pH
Reducer”
2.4 RESILIENT BASE MATERIALS
A. Wall Base: FS SS-W-40, either Type I rubber or Type II vinyl, and as follows:
1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply
with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered
acceptable:
a. Johnsonite
2. Height: 4 inches or 6 inches (as noted on Drawings).
3. Thickness: 1/8 inch.
4. Style: Standard toe base.
5. Finish: Dull, or matte.
B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors produced for
rubber accessory molding complying with requirements indicated, up to 2-colors.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
A. Resilient Edge Strips: Solid rubber or vinyl edging, in tapered or rounded profile,
nominally 1 inch in width and 1/8 inch in thickness.
1. Color: As selected by the architect from manufacturer’s standard product line.
B. Adhesive: Type recommended by manufacturer of resilient product for specific
substrate conditions.
C. Rubber Accessory Moldings: Provide rubber accessory moldings complying with the
following:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Johnsonite, a Division of Duramax, Inc.
2. Available Products: The following Johnsonite products are listed to establish
profiles and dimensions:
a. Carpet edge for glue-down applications: #EG-XX-H.
b. Carpet-to-walk off mat joiner: #CE-XX-A.
c. Reducer strip for resilient flooring: #RSS-XX-D
d. Resilient flooring-to-carpet joiner: #CTA-XX-C.
3. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors
produced for rubber accessory molding complying with requirements indicated.
2.6 COLORS AND PATTERNS
A. Provide colors and patterns of resilient flooring materials as selected by the architect
form manufacturer’s standard product line. Colors to be selected after contract award.
1. Resilient sheet flooring: Allow for one color from manufacturers full range of
colors.
2. Resilient wall base: Allow for one color from manufacturers full range of colors.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500 - 5
3. Rubber accessory moldings: Allow for one color from manufacturers full range of
colors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will
occur, with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements,
including those for maximum moisture content. Verify that substrates and conditions
are satisfactory for resilient product installation and comply with requirements
specified. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing
substrates indicated to receive resilient products.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are
incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using
mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing
resilient products. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts,
carbonation, or dust. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
E. pH Reducer: Prepare concrete substrate to receive manufacturer’s written instructions.
Perform pH reduction as necessary prior to application of moisture control.
F. Moisture Control System: Prepare concrete substrate per moisture control system
manufacturer’s written instructions. Preparation includes crack and joint fill.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install resilient products according to manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe
spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
1. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with
tops of adjacent pieces aligned.
2. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base
in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
3. Do not stretch base during installation.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500 - 6
4. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top
edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler
material.
5. Install premolded outside corners before installing straight pieces.
6. Form inside corners on job, from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, by
cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner
is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to
substrate.
7. Place resilient products so they are butted to adjacent materials and bond to
substrates with adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that would
otherwise be exposed.
C. Hand roll tiles according to tile manufacturer's written instructions.
D. pH Reducer: Apply pH reducer per manufacturer’s written instructions.
E. Moisture Control System: Mix and apply moisture control per manufacturer’s written
instructions
3.4 RESILIENT STAIR TREAD/RISER
A. Installation:
1. The installation of the rubber stair treads should not begin until the work of all
other trades has been completed, especially overhead trades. Areas to receive
stair treads shall be clean, fully enclosed, weathertight, and maintained at a
uniform temperature of at least 65 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and
after the installation is completed. The stair steps shall be smooth, flat,
permanently dry, clean and free of all foreign material, such as dust, paint,
grease, oils, solvents, curing and hardening compounds, sealers, asphalt, and
old adhesive residue. Stair treads may be installed on any smooth, dry interior
step. Stair shape shall conform closely to stair tread contour, especially where
the flat part of the tread joins the nosing. An epoxy caulking nose filler shall be
applied to ensure a tight fit and eliminate any voids between the step edge and
stair tread nosing, and the stair tread and the rubber stair tread. Stair treads shall
be trimmed to within 1/16-inch of the riser and stringer to allow for expansion.
Adhesives shall be applied per tread manufacturer’s instructions. The stair tread
and nosing portion of the stair tread shall be bonded directly to the step surface.
Do not overlap the nosing over resilient riser material. Stair trades shall be rolled,
with a J-hand roller after installation to ensure proper bonding.
B. Adhesives:
1. Basis of Design: Johnsonite #965 Acrylic Flooring and Tread Adhesive.
Application as follows:
a. Porous Surfaces – 1/16-inch square notch trowel (approx. coverage 125
s.f./gal).
b. Nonporous Surfaces – 1/16-inch V-notched trowel (approx. coverage 145
s.f./gal).
2. Basis of Design: Johnsonite #945 Contact Bond Adhesive. Application as follows:
a. Brush or roller (approx. coverage 360 s.f./gal.)
3. Basis of Design: Johnsonite #930 Two-Part Epoxy Caulking Compound.
Application as follows:
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500 - 7
a. Gun, knife or 13-1/2 ounce cartridge. ( approx. coverage 250 l.f./gal)
C Refer to manufacturer’s installation manual for complete installation direction and
details. Deviation from manufacturer’s written direction will not be allowed.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products:
1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by
resilient product manufacturers.
2. Sweep or vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly.
3. Do not wash resilient products until after time period recommended by resilient
product manufacturer.
4. Damp-mop or sponge resilient products to remove marks and soil.
B. Protect resilient products against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from
construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder
of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing
by resilient product manufacturer.
1. Apply protective floor polish to vinyl resilient products installed on floors that are
free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes, if recommended by
manufacturer.
a. Use commercially available products acceptable to resilient product
manufacturer.
b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.
2. Cover resilient products installed on floors with undyed, untreated building paper
until inspection for Substantial Completion.
C. Clean resilient products not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections
intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean
products according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. Before cleaning, strip protective floor polish that was applied to vinyl products on
floors after completing installation only if required to restore polish finish and if
recommended by resilient product manufacturer.
2. After cleaning, reapply polish on vinyl products on floors to restore protective
floor finish according to resilient product manufacturer's written
recommendations. Coordinate with Owner's maintenance program.
D. Protect Moisture Control System prior to installation of floor finish from abuse by use of
wood sheathing.
END OF SECTION 09 6500
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
PAINTING 09 9100 - 1
SECTION 09 9100 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:
1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces.
2. Exposed interior items and surfaces.
3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition
to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or
material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not
specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar
adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules
do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes
available.
1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts
(including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal
surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment.
C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating
parts, and labels.
1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
a. Architectural woodwork and casework.
b. Acoustical wall panels.
c. Metal toilet enclosures.
d. Metal lockers.
e. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
f. Light fixtures.
2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible
spaces:
a. Furred areas.
b. Crawl space.
c. Ceiling plenums.
d. Pipe spaces.
3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a. Anodized aluminum.
b. Stainless steel.
c. Chromium plate.
4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a. Valve and damper operators.
b. Linkages.
c. Sensing devices.
d. Motor and fan shafts.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
PAINTING 09 9100 - 2
5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or
other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or
nomenclature plates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
1. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
2. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
3. Semi-gloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65
when measured at a 60-degree meter.
4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.
1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each
material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify
each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including
label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating
material proposed for use.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for each type of finish-coat material indicated.
1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other
information specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting
system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a
record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating
system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
D. Master Painters Institute:
1. Paint systems and applications shall comply with MPI-2006 ‘Architectural
Painting Specifications Manual’.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and
containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
PAINTING 09 9100 - 3
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a
minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean
condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and
waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are
protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and
application.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F.
B. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85
percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet
surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted
are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in the paint
schedules.
B. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are approved, additional
manufacturers may be submitted for substitute subject to compliance with requirements of
the construction documents.
1. Benjamin-Moore (B&M).
2. Sherwin-Williams Co. (S&W).
3. ICI Paint Stores (ICI).
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials
that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating
types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product
identification will not be acceptable.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
PAINTING 09 9100 - 4
1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate
colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be
used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish
manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed
substitutions.
2. Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, and other painting materials shall be pure, be
compatible with other coating materials, bear identifying labels on containers, and be
of highest quality of an approved manufacturer listed in MPI manuals. Tinting color
shall be best grade of type recommended by Manufacturer of paint or stain used on
Project.
C. Colors: As selected by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which
painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements.
1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and
conditions within a particular area.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over
substrates primed by others.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is
impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied
protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed
using workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of
substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease
before cleaning.
1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning
process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to
manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers,
mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth
and dust off.
a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white
shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
PAINTING 09 9100 - 5
priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood
filler. Sand smooth when dried.
b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime
edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets,
counters, cases, and paneling.
3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop
coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use
solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures
Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations.
a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and
according to requirements of SSPC-SP 10.
b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash
coat before priming.
c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged.
Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and
touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.
4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents
so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from
galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as
required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary,
remove surface film and strain material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended
limits.
E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when
multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the
finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each
separate coat.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.
2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in
fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar
components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain
the system integrity and provide desired protection.
5. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible
through registers or grilles.
6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before the final installation of permanently fixed equipment, paint surfaces
behind equipment with prime coat only.
7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match
exposed surfaces.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
PAINTING 09 9100 - 6
8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
9. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before
subsequent surface deterioration.
1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of
application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured
as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth,
even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between
applications.
2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
3. Sand surfaces of electrical distribution panel covers and paint to match adjacent
surfaces.
4. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply
additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give
special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners
receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
5. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not
recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel
sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of
paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other
applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of
appropriate size for the surface or item being painted.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as
recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by
the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as
recommended by the manufacturer.
E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to
items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces, including distribution panels.
F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports.
2. Exposed ductwork.
3. Insulation.
4. Accessory items.
G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Conduit and fittings.
2. Switchgear.
3. Panelboard covers.
H. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as
recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished
and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
PAINTING 09 9100 - 7
evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat
with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
I. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a
smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness,
spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections
will not be acceptable.
J. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a surface film of even luster.
Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel,
nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
1. Provide satin finish for final coats.
K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,
refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as
often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:
1. The Owner may engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the
paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken,
identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor.
2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as
required by the Owner:
a. Quantitative material analysis.
b. Abrasion resistance.
c. Apparent reflectivity.
d. Flexibility.
e. Washability.
f. Absorption.
g. Accelerated weathering.
h. Dry opacity.
i. Accelerated yellowness.
j. Recoating.
k. Skinning.
l. Color retention.
m. Alkali and mildew resistance.
3. The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material
being used does not comply with specified requirements. The Contractor shall
remove noncomplying paint from the site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces
previously coated with the rejected paint. If necessary, the Contractor may be
required to remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting
with specified paint, the 2 coatings are incompatible.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other
discarded paint materials from the site.
1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove
spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage
adjacent finished surfaces.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
PAINTING 09 9100 - 8
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by
Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective
wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore
damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA
P1.
3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal complying
with MPI Ext 5.1M System. Primer is not required on shop-primed items.
1. Semi-gloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer.
a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer complying with MPI #107, applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film
thickness of not less than 1.3 mils.
1) S&W: B66W1, DTM Acrylic Primer
2) B&M: HP04/FP04, Acrylic Metal Primer
b. First and Second Coats: Semi-gloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel complying
with MPI #168, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to
achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils.
1) 2) S&W: B66W351, Sher-cryl HPA
2) B&M: 791/K791, Waterborne Alkyd
B. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated
(galvanized) metal surfaces complying with MPI Ext. 5.3H System.
1. Semi-gloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a galvanized metal primer.
a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer complying with MPI #134, applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film
thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.
1) S&W: B66W1, DTM Acrylic Primer
2) B&M: HP04/FP04, Acrylic Metal Primer
b. First and Second Coats: Semi-gloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel complying
with MPI #11, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to
achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils.
1) S&W: A8W16, Exterior Latex
2) B&M: 543/K43, Exterior Acrylic
C. Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU): Provide the following finish systems over CMU
complying with MPI Ext. 4.2H System.
1. Water repellent non-paintable, 3 coats.
a. Sealant: A penetrating silicone, clear water repellent for exterior masonry
block, complying with MPI #117, applied at spreading rate recommended
by manufacturer.
1) S&W: A 10T000 7, Loxon Siloxane
2) B&M: 194 Coronado Siloxane
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
PAINTING 09 9100 - 9
3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces
complying with MPI Int 9.2 System.:
1. Ceilings: Low-Luster, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Latex-based, interior primer complying with MPI #50, applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film
thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.
1) S&W: B28W81, Interior Primer Sealer
2) B&M N534, Ultra Spec Primer
b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex, interior
enamel complying with MPI #44, applied at spreading rate recommended by
the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils.
1) S&W: B20W4451, Interior Latex
2) B&M: 486, Scuff-X Interior
2. Walls: Semi-gloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Latex-based, interior primer complying with MPI #50, applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film
thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.
1) S&W: B28W81, Interior Primer Sealer
2) B&M: N534, Ultra Spec Primer
b. First and Second Coats: Semi-gloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel complying
with MPI #54, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to
achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils.
1) S&W: B21W451, Interior Latex
2) B&M: 486, Scuff-X Interior
3. Concessions and Restrooms Walls and Ceukubg: Semi-gloss, epoxy paint: 2 finish
coats over a primer complying with MPI Int 9.2F
a. Primer: Latex-based, interior primer complying with MPI #50, applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film
thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.
1) ICI: 1000-1200, Hi-Hide interior Primer Sealer
2) S&W: B28W81, Interior Primer Sealer
b. First and Second Coats: Semi-gloss, solvent based two component epoxy
coating complying with MPI #77, applied at spreading rate recommended by
the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils.
1) ICI: 4406, Tru-Glaze-WB
2) S&W: B62WZ111, Tile-Clad HS Epoxy
B. Woodwork: Provide the following finishes over new, interior woodwork:
1. Clear-stain:
a. Clear Satin Waterborne, Satin-Varnish Finish: 3 finish coats of a waterborne,
clear-satin varnish over a sanding sealer. Wipe wood filler before applying
stain.
b. First, Second and Third Coats: Waterborne, varnish finish complying with MPI
#128, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer.
1) S&W: A68F90, Waterborne Polyurethane
2) B&M: 1WB – 1427, Aqua- Plastic Waterborne Clear Satin
2. Paint:
a. Alkyd Semi-gloss Finish: 2 finish coats over 1 alkyd primer sealer complying
with MPI Int 6.4B.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
PAINTING 09 9100 - 10
b. Primer: A solvent based alkyd pigmented primer/sealer complying with MPI
#45, applied at a spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve
a total dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.
1) S&W: B49W2, Wall and Wood Primer
2) B&M: N534, Ultra Spec Primer
c. First and Second Coats: Semi-gloss, solvent based alkyd interior paint
complying with MPI #47, applied at a spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of 1.8 mils.
1) S&W: B34W555, Interior Alkyd Enamel
2) B&M: 486, Scuff-X Interior
C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal complying with MPI
Int 5.1E.
1. Semi-gloss, Alkyd Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Solvent base, alkyd type anti-corrosive primer, as recommended by
the manufacturer for this substrate, complying with MPI #79, applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film
thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.
1) S&W: B50WZ1, Universal Metal Primer
2) B&M: PO6/KP06, Alkyd Metal Primer
b. First and Second Finish Coats: Solvent based alkyd complying with MPI #47,
applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total
dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils.
1) S&W: B34W555, Interior Alkyd Enamel
2) B&M: C271, Alkyd Enamel
D. Zinc-Coated Metal: High-Gloss, High-Performance Finish: Two finish coats over a primer,
complying with MPI Int 5.3M.
1. Semi-gloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: One finish coat over an undercoat and a primer.
a. Primer: Water based metal primer, corrosion resistant, complying with MPI
#134 applied as recommended by the manufacturer.
1) S&W: B66-310, Pro-cryl
2) B&M: HP 04/ FP 04, Acrylic Primer
b. First and second finish coats: High performance interior latex complying with
MPI #141, applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve
a dry film thickness of 1.5 to 4.0 mils.
1) S&W: B34, ProClassic XP
2) B&M: HP 29/ FP 29, DTM Acrylic Enamel
E. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): Provide the following finish system on CMU complying
with MPI Int 4.2A.
1. Water Repellant: Provide the following finish systems over CMU complying with
MPI Int. 4.2L System.
a. Water repellent non-paintable, 3 coats, a penetrating silicone, clear water
repellent for exterior masonry block, complying with MPI #117, applied at
spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.
1) S&W: Loxon 7% Siloxane
2) B&M: 194 Coronado Siloxane
2. Concessions and Restrooms: Semi-gloss, epoxy paint, 2 finish coats
over a primer complying with MPI Int. 4.2G.
a. Primer: A solvent based, two component, epoxy high solids coating
complying with MPI #116, applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve manufacturer recommended dry film thickness.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
PAINTING 09 9100 - 11
1) ICI: 4000, Bloxfil HD
2) S&W: B42W00400, Kem Cari-Coat HS Epoxy Filler/Sealer
b. First and Second Coats: A solvent based, two component, epoxy high
solids coating complying with MPI #77, applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve manufacturer recommended
dry film thickness.
1) ICI: 4406, Tru-Glaze WB
2) S&W: B62WZ111, Tile-Clad HS Epoxy
F. Concrete: Provide the following finish system on concrete slabs complying with MPI Int
3.2F
1. Water based, acrylic co-polymer emulsion clear sealer for concrete floors complying
with MPI #99.
a. First coat and Second Coats: Applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness recommended by the
manufacturer.
1) S&W: 50.043054, Concrete & Masonry Waterproofing Sealer
2) PPG Paints: 4-6200 Perma-Crete Plex-Seal, Clear Sealer
G. Painted Handrails:
a. Primer: Water based metal primer, corrosion resistant, complying with MPI
#134 applied as recommended by the manufacturer.
1) ICI: 4020,Devflex WB DTM Primer Finish
2) S&W: B66W1, DTM Acrylic Primer
b. First and second finish coats: High performance interior latex complying with
MPI #141, applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve
a dry film thickness of 1.5 to 4.0 mils.
1) ICI:1406-0110. Interior wall and trim enamel
2) S&W: B66W351, Sher-Cryl HPA
END OF SECTION 09 9100
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 1550 - 1
SECTION 10 1550 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes toilet compartments and screens as follows:
1. Type: Solid-plastic, polymer resin.
2. Compartment Style: Overhead braced and floor anchored.
3. Screen Style: Wall hung.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 10 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet paper holders, grab bars,
purse shelves, and similar accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and style of toilet compartment and screen specified.
Include details of construction relative to materials, fabrication, and installation. Include
details of anchors, hardware, and fastenings.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of toilet compartment and screen
assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
1. Show locations of reinforcement and cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet
accessories.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of sections of
actual units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each
type of compartment or screen indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: Of each compartment or screen color and finish required,
prepared on 4-inch-square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for
Work.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements
before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without
delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating units
without field measurements. Coordinate supports, adjacent construction, and
fixture locations to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established
dimensions.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 1550 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. Capitol Partitions, Inc.
2. Compression Polymers Group; Comtec Industries.
3. Global Steel Products Corporation.
4. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation.
5. Santana Products, Inc.
6. Sanymetal: a Crane Plumbing Company.
7. Weis/Robart Partitions, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and
smoothness. Exposed surfaces that exhibit pitting, stains, discolorations, or other
imperfections on finished units are unacceptable.
B. Solid-Plastic, Polymer Resin: High-density polyethylene (HDPE) with homogenous
color throughout. Provide material not less than 1-inch-thick with seamless
construction and eased edges in color and pattern as follows:
1. Colors and Patterns: Two colors in each room as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns.
C. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304 stainless steel, not
less than 0.0312-inch-thick and 3 inches high, finished to match hardware.
D. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design for attaching
panels and screens to walls and pilasters of the following material:
1. Material: Clear-anodized aluminum, or
2. Material: Stainless steel.
E. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating
hardware and accessories of one of the following materials:
1. Material: Chrome-plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear-anodized
aluminum.
2. Material: Stainless steel.
3. Material: Chrome-plated brass.
F. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail
with antigrip profile in manufacturer's standard finish.
G. Heat-Sinc Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum strip in
manufacturer's standard finish.
H. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless
steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 1550 - 3
type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed
anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for
compartment system. Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive
compartment-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.
1. Provide internal reinforcement in metal units for compartment-mounted
hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.
B. Solid-Plastic, Polymer-Resin Compartments and Screens: Provide aluminum heat-sink
strips at exposed bottom edges of HDPE units to prevent burning.
C. Overhead-Braced-and-Floor-Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturer's
standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at
pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous
head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and
leveling mechanism.
D. Floor-Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant
anchoring assemblies complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling
adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at
pilasters to conceal anchorage.
E. Floor-Anchored Screens: Provide pilasters and panels of same construction and finish
as toilet compartments. Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring
assemblies complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at
pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal
anchorage.
F. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-wide in-swinging doors for
standard toilet compartments and 36-inch-wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-
inch-wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold
door open at any angle up to 90 degrees.
2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit with
combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper designed for emergency
access. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped
bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumpers at out-swinging
doors or entrance screen doors.
5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit that complies with accessibility
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at out-swinging doors. Provide
units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be handicapped
accessible.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 1550 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2-inch between
pilasters and panels and not more than 1-inch between panels and walls. Secure units
in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
1. Secure panels to walls and panels with continuous brackets. Locate wall
brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.
B. Overhead-Braced-and-Floor-Anchored Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor and
level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less
than 2 fasteners. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead
brace when doors are in closed position.
C. Screens: Attach with anchoring devices according to manufacturer's written
instructions and to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb and to resist
lateral impact.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer’s
written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open
approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-
swinging doors and swing doors in entrance screens to return to fully closed position.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet compartments and
screens are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 10 1550
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10 4413 - 1
SECTION 10 4413 – FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Portable fire extinguishers.
2. Semi-recessed fire-protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers.
3. Fire-protection accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection specialties.
1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.
2. Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods,
relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet
type, trim style, and panel style.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a
single manufacturer.
B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10,
"Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers."
C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Provide extinguishers listed and labeled by FM.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated
and provided by Owner under separate Contract are accommodated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Portable Fire Extinguishers:
a. Ansul Incorporated.
2. Fire-Protection Cabinets:
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10 4413 - 2
a. J.L. Industries, Inc.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in the Fire-
Protection Cabinet Schedule at the end of Part 3.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: Carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M, commercial
quality, stretcher leveled, temper rolled.
2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each cabinet and other
locations indicated.
B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, in
enameled-steel container.
2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINETS
A. Cabinet Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door,
and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and
grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
1. Cabinet Metal: Enameled-steel sheet.
B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for a fire extinguisher.
C. Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for the following mounting conditions:
1. Semirecessed: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit style
of trim indicated.
D. Cabinet Trim Style: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and
ground smooth.
1. Exposed Trim on Semirecessed Cabinets: One-piece combination trim and
perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face
and wall return at outer edge (backbend).
a. Rolled-Edge Trim: 3-inch backbend depth.
E. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet.
F. Door Material: Steel sheet.
G. Door Glazing: Manufacturer's standard, as follows:
1. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, Kind
FT, Class 1, Clear.
H. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design, as follows:
1. Narrow vertical glazing panel.
I. Door Construction: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, of materials
indicated, and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10 4413 - 3
1. Provide minimum 1/2-inch-thick door frames, fabricated with tubular stiles and rails,
and hollow-metal design.
2. Provide inside latch and lock.
J. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type
for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide exposed door
pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous-type hinge permitting door to open
180 degrees.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher, of
sizes required for types and capacities of extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-
enamel finish.
1. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets.
B. Door Locks: Provide cylinder lock with flexible cam. All cabinets to be keyed alike.
C. Identification: Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,
color, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
1. Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red
letter decals applied to wall surface.
2. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to
door.
a. Application Process: Silk-screened.
b. Lettering Color: Red.
c. Orientation: Vertical.
2.6 COLORS
A. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Cabinet and Door Finishes: Provide manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the
following:
1. Exterior of cabinets and doors, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another
finish.
2. Interior of cabinets and doors.
2.8 STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other
contaminants that could impair paint bond using manufacturer's standard methods.
B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's
standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.
Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a
minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10 4413 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections before
cabinet installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and
semirecessed cabinets are to be installed.
C. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire-protection specialties.
B. Install in locations indicated, with bottom of cabinets approximately 40 inches above the
floor.
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Adjust cabinet doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Refinish or replace cabinets and doors damaged during installation.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that cabinets and doors are
without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
3.4 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET SCHEDULE
A. Fire-Protection Cabinet: Where this designation is indicated, provide fire-protection cabinet
complying with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. "Ambassador C1017" by J.L. Industries, Inc.
2. Cabinet Material: Enameled-steel sheet.
3. Type: Fire extinguisher.
4. Mounting: Semi-recessed.
5. Trim Style: Rolled edge.
6. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet.
7. Door Material: Steel sheet.
8. Door Glazing: Clear tempered glass.
9. Door Style: Narrow vertical glazing panel.
10. Color: Match Architect's samples.
a. Steel Finish: Baked enamel.
B. Fire-Protection Bracket Mounted: Where this designation is indicated, provide fire-
protection bracket complying with the following:
1. Mounting: Bracket mounted.
END OF SECTION 10 4413
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 8000 - 1
SECTION 10 8000 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Toilet and bath accessories.
2. Underlavatory guards.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 10 Section "Toilet Compartments" for compartments and screens.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses,
dimensions, profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes
for each type of accessory specified.
B. Samples: For each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements.
1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.
C. Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate
preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring
devices.
D. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by
room of each accessory required. Use designations indicated in the Toilet and Bath
Accessory Schedule and room designations indicated on Drawings in product
schedule.
E. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1. Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory
unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise approved by
Architect.
B. Product Options: Accessory requirements, including those for materials, finishes,
dimensions, capacities, and performance, are established by specific products
indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule.
1. Products of other manufacturers with equal characteristics, as judged solely by
Architect, may be provided.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 8000 - 2
2. Do not modify aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Architect for review.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances
required for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation,
cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B. Provide adequate blocking to securely anchor all accessories.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of
other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor
under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Manufacturer's Mirror Warranty: Written warranty, executed by mirror manufacturer
agreeing to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within minimum
warranty period indicated.
1. Minimum Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering accessories that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1. Toilet and Bath Accessories:
a. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
b. American Specialties, Inc.
c. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
d. Bradley Corporation.
e. McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories Corp.
2. Infant-Care Products:
a. American Specialties, Inc.
b. Brocar Products, Inc.
c. Koala Corporation.
d. Safe-Strap Company, Inc.
3. Underlavatory Guards:
a. Brocar Products, Inc.
b. Truebro, Inc.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated in the Toilet
and Bath Accessory Schedule at the end of Part 3.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 8000 - 3
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish (satin), in 0.0312-inch
minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Brass: ASTM B 19, leaded and unleaded flat products; ASTM B 16, rods, shapes,
forgings, and flat products with finished edges; ASTM B 30, castings.
C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold rolled, commercial quality, 0.0359-inch
minimum nominal thickness; surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required
for applied finish.
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60.
E. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service),
nickel plus chromium electrodeposited on base metal.
F. Baked-Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, gloss-white, baked-acrylic-enamel coating.
G. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with
silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with
FS DD-M-411.
H. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
I. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit,
tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Names or labels are not permitted on exposed faces of accessories. On
interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface of each accessory, provide
printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and
product model number.
B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and
exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with continuous stainless-steel
hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible.
C. Recessed Toilet Accessories: Fabricate units of all-welded construction, without
mitered corners. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, stainless-steel hinge.
Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed.
D. Framed Glass-Mirror Units: Fabricate frames for glass-mirror units to accommodate
glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that
permits rigid, tamper-resistant glass installation and prevents moisture accumulation.
1. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034-inch and full mirror
size, with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an
acceptable filler material.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 8000 - 4
E. Mirror-Unit Hangers: Provide mirror-unit mounting system that permits rigid, tamper-
and theft-resistant installation, as follows:
1. Heavy-duty wall brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking
devices requiring a special tool to remove.
F. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and
resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions, using fasteners
appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install
units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper-resistant manner with special hangers,
toggle bolts, or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated,
according to manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated.
C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested
according to method in ASTM F 446.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms
function properly. Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
3.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
A. Toilet Tissue Dispenser:
1. Product: Available products include the following:
a. Bobrick #B-2740.
b. Bradley Model 5241.
2. Type: Double-roll dispenser
3. Mounting: Surface mounted including partition mounted serving two adjacent
toilet compartments.
4. Capacity: Designed for 5-inch-diameter-core tissue rolls.
B. Paper Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. Bobrick #B-3699.
b. Bradley Model 2291.
2. Surface-Mounted Type: Dispenser shall accommodate 475 multi-fold or 350 C-
fold towels and have a 2 gallon receptacle capacity.
City of Rexburg Jr. Ball Fields Concessions Jan 2020 Rexburg, ID
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 8000 - 5
C. Soap Dispenser:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. Bobrick #B-2111.
b. Bradley Model 6562.
2. Liquid Soap Dispenser, Vertical-Tank Type: Surface-mounted.
a. Capacity: 40 fl oz.
D. Grab Bar:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. Bobrick #B-5806.99 Series.
b. Bradley Model 8322-001x36.
2. Length: 36 inches.
3. Stainless-Steel Nominal Thickness: Minimum 0.05-inch.
4. Mounting: Concealed with manufacturer's standard flanges and anchors.
5. Gripping Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard slip-resistant texture.
6. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches.
E. Grab Bar:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. Bradley Model 8322-002-042.
2. Length: 42 inches.
3. Stainless-Steel Nominal Thickness: Minimum 0.05-inch.
4. Mounting: Concealed with manufacturer's standard flanges and anchors.
5. Gripping Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard slip-resistant texture.
6. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches.
F. Grab Bar:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. Bradley Model 8322-001-18.
b. Bobrick B-5806.99 Series.
2. Length: 18 inches.
3. Stainless-Steel Nominal Thickness: Minimum 0.05-inch.
4. Mounting: Concealed with manufacturer's standard flanges and anchors.
5. Gripping Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard slip-resistant texture.
6. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches.
G. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. Bobrick #B-354.
b. Bradley Model 4721-15.
2. Mounting: Surface mounting type with concealed fasteners.
H. Mirror Unit:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. Bobrick #B-165 1836.
b. Bradley Model 781 x 1836.
2. Stainless-Steel, Channel-Framed Mirror: Fabricate frame from stainless-steel
channels in manufacturer's standard satin or bright finish with square corners
mitered to hairline joints and mechanically interlocked.
END OF SECTION 10 8000